HomeMy WebLinkAboutVAIL DAS SCHONE FILING 1 TRACT C LOT 1 FIRST BANK 1 OF 6 PART 2 LEGALr
2.3 ASPHALT PAVING MIX
I A. Use dry material- to avoid foaming' Mix unj-formly'
I B. Binder Course: CDOT TYPe C'
I C. Wearing Course: CDOT TYPe CX'
! 2.4 souRcn ouALrrY coNTRoL
IA.Providemixdesignforasphaltunderprovisionsof
I Division 1.
r B. Submit proposed mix design of each type of mix for revi-ew
I Prior to commencement of work'
- C. Test samples in accordance with AI MS-2'
t
PART 3 - EXECUT]ONI
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
I A. Verify base conditions under provisions of Divisj.on 1.
I
B.Verifythatcompactedsubgradeandgranularbaseisdry
I and ready to support pavi-ng and imposed loads '
I 3.2 PREPARATION - PRIMER
t A. Apply primer on base or subbase over subgrade surface at
uniform rate of 1/3 qallsq. Yd'
t B. Apply primer to- contact surfaces of curbs' gutters and
other concrete flatwork.
t C. Use clean sand to blot excess primer'
? ? PREPARATION - TACK COATII A. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces over
sutqtaa. surface at uniform rate of l/3 gallsq' yd'
t B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and
other concrete fLatwork'
- C. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond
with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces'
I
3.4 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE
I
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02510 - 3
I
within 4 hours of applying
inches maximum compacted
Drawj-ngs.
two hours of placing and
P1ace wearing course to compacted thickness indicated on
Drawings.
Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude
pavement from positlon. Hand compact in areas
inaccessible to ro}}1ng equipment.
F. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even
and smooth finish, without roller marks.
A
B.
D.
E.
R
c.
D.
PLace asphaJ-t binder course
primer or tack coat.
Pl-ace binder course to 3
thickness per lift. Refer to
Place wearing course within
compacting binder course.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5
3.6
A.
TOLERANCES
FLatness: Maximum variation of
foot straight edge.
Scheduled Compacted Thlckness:
Variation from True Elevation:
No ponding.
1/4 inch measured with 10
llithin 1/4 inch.
Wi-thin I/2 inch.
FIXED QUALITY CONTROL
Field i-nspection and testing will be performed under
provisions of Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services
by the Owner as directed by the Architect and coordinated
and scheduled by the Contractor.
Asphalt Pavements: Check compaction and compliance with
design mix by cutting test plugs where directed in
accordance with ASTM D 979. Patch core holes. Test for
compaction minimum of 95t of Marshall design density,
aggregate gradation voids, and percent asphalt.
One (1) test for density ASTM D 1188, ASTM D2'726, or D
2950 thickness ASTM D 3549, and air voids ASTM D 3203 per
300 tons of asphaltic material placed.
One (1) test for asphalt content ASTM D 2t72 and aggregate
gradation per 1500 tons of asphaltic material- placed.
A.
B.
?
D.
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 02510 - 4
I
t
I
t
I
E. A1I reports shall- include densities to the nearest 0.1 Ib-
E+- - *.Jljs! J-L. crrr\r compaction to nearest 0.1?. If a nuclear
device is used, the report shall contain the method used
(back scatter or direct transmission geometry) , results of
the daily standardization checks and the adjusted
manufacturers calibration curve. The manufacturers
calibration curve shalL be adjusted as required by ASTM
D2950 whenever a change in either the materiaf to be
tested or the testing equipment is made.
F. Subgrade: Compaction tests shall be taken every 2000
_ square feet and,/or as directed by the Owner.
J ? PROTECTIONI
I A. Immediately after placement' protect pavement from
mechanical injury for duration of constructlon.
I 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. By Owner.
END OF SECTION 025].0
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING ntRln - q
r sEcrroN 02s20 - PoRTLAND cEMENT coNcRETE PAVTNG
I PARTl-cENERAL
I
1. ]. SECTION INCLUDES
I A. Concrete sidewaLks, driveways and aprons'
1; B. Aggregate base course.r 1,.2 RELATED SECTIONS
I A. Sectj_on 022!L _ Rough Grading: preparation of sire for
paving and base.
I B. secti-on 02223 - Backfilling: compacted subbase for
Paving.
I 1.3 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Concrete Pavement Mix:
I 1. Basis of Measurement: By the cubic yard'
2. Basis of Payment: Includes mix design, supplying to
I site, testing.
I
B. Concrete Placed:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the square yard Per inch
thickness.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes preparing base, placing,
floating and finj-shing' testing-
r 1.4 REFERENCES
I A. ACI 30L - Specifi-cations for Structuraf Concrete'
I B. AcI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,r Transporting and Placing Concrete'
I C. ANSI/ASTM D1?51 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filfers for
t Concrete Paving and Structural Construction'
I D. ANSr/A5TM DL'752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
I Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construct ion -
It E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Bil]et-Steel for Concrete
Reinforcement.
F. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
c. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
I
I
I
I
I
PoRTLAND cEMENT coNcRErE PAVTNG 02520 - 1.
ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C309 - Llquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
FS TT-C-800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and
Existing Surfaces.
Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT)
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Paving: Designed for trucks up to 40r000 lbs.
SUBMITTALS
Subrnit under provisions of Division 1.
Product Data: Provide data on admixtures and curing
compounds.
Laboratory test reports for concrete materiaLs and mix
designs.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 30L, requirements of
Section 03300.
Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout
i-\ ra\ i ar-f
REGUI,ATORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOI)
Standards and Specifications for Roadway Construction for
concrete paving within the rights-of-way.
ENVIRONMENTAI REQUIREMENTS
Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is
l-ess than 40 degrees F or surface is wet or frozen.
- PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS
Steel form materials, profiled to suit conditions.
Joint Filler & Sealant: As indicated on Drawings.
1q
1.6
r.l
1R
A.
PART
2.t
H.
I.
J.
K.
A.
R
A
B.
L.
A
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
A.
A.
B.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2
I
I
I
t
I
t
I 2.2 REINFORCEMENT
I A. Reinforcing Steel: Shal-l be 40ksi deformed bars placed in
I compliance with CDOT Standards and Speciflcations for
concrete reinforcing within the rights-of-way.
I B. Wel-ded wire Fabric: Shafl be 6x6 - 6/6 in fl-at sheets
only; pJ-ace as shown on drawings.
|l 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALSI
I A. Concrete Material-s: As specified in Sectlon 03300.
I Provide right-of-way material in accordance with CDOTr Standards and Specifications.
B. Fine and Course Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33 crushed stone.
C. Water: Potable, not detrimental- to concrete.
D. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260 liquid compound specifically
formulated for the sol-e purpose of entrainj-ng air'
E. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A - Water Reducing
agent and sha1l be equal to "Pozzolith" as manufactured by
Master Buil"ders Company.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Compound: Damp cure or use "2200-White" white
pigmented based spray (manufactured by W. R. Meadows
Company) on curing compound meeting ASTM C309, Type 2,
Cl-as s B .
r 2.5 CONCRETE MrX
A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete
I in accordance with ASTM C94.
r B. Select proportions for normaf weight concrete in
- accordance with ACI 301 Method.
t c. Provide concrete to the following criteria:
1. Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi G 28 days
3,000 psi @ sidewalks
2. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 j-nch.
3. Slump: 4 inches maximum.4. Minimum Water/Cement Ratio: .45.
5. Air Entrained: 6 percent +/- percent.
D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather onJ-y when
approved by Architect. Use of admixtures will not relax
col-d weather placement reguirements.
E. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when
I
t
t
I
I PoRTLAND cEMENT coNcRETE PAvTNG
I
02520 - 3
.n'^rr'.\.t16.l hrr Arahi fcntqPlJr v
2.6 JOINT SEALANT
A. Dow-Cornj-ng 888, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement and
Dow-Corning 890, for Portland Cement Concrete to Asphalt
Paveway.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide mix design under provisi-ons of Division L.
B. Engage a testing agency acceptable to the Architect to
perform proposed mix design and materiaL evaluation for. review prior to commencement of work.
C. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure
conformance with specified requirements.
D. Test samples in accordance with ACI-301.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINAIION
A. Verify base conditions under provisions of Divj-sj-on 1.
B. Verify compacted granular base is acceptable and ready to
support paving and j-mposed Loads.
C, Veri-fy gradients and elevatj-ons of base area correct.
3.2 SUBBASE
A. Prepare subbase in accordance with Colorado Department of
Transportation Standards and Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of htater from fresh
concrete. Do not over water.
B. Coat form surfaces with approved, non-residual, low-VOC,
form coating compound prior to concrete pour.
C. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to conmencement of
concretlng operaELons.
3.4 FORMING
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and
profile.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
IPORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
3.5
3.5
21
Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling
without damaging concrete.
Pl-ace j oint f il-.Ler verticaf in position, in straight
l-ines. Secure to formwork during concrete pfacement.
REINFORCEMENT
As shown on drawings.
PLACING CONCRETE
PLace concrete in right-of-way in accordance with CDOT
Standards and Speci-fications, place on-site concrete in
accordance with Section 03300.
Ensure inserts, embedded parts, and formed ioints are not
disturbed during concrete placement.
C. Place concrete continuously between predetermined
construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive
pours such that cold joints occur.
JOINTS
(Pavement joints wiII be designated as construction
joints, isolation or expansion joints, and control joints.
The joints shall- be constructed as shown on the plans and
in accordance with the following specifications. )
The faces of all joints shall be at a rJ-ght angle to the
top surface of the pavement. Construction joints are
those made by placing fresh concrete against previously
cured concrete at planned locations. Forms for transverse
construction joints shall remain in place until paving
operations are resumed on the other side of the joint.
Concrete on both sides of the longitudinal and transverse
eonstruction joints sha1l be tied together by keyway as
shown on the plans.
Sawed joints shaIl be made with suitable power driven
saws. The Contractor shall have a minimum of two working
pohrer saws and one standby power saw on the project when
concrete operations are underway.
Controf joints shall extend continuously across the full
width of the concrete and shall be constructed in two
stages. The first stage saw cut shall be made to a depth
egual to one-fourth of the slab thickness by L/8"
thickness as early as sawing can be done in order to
prevent random cracking. The second stage shall consist
of widening the first stage saw cut to 3/8" to a depth of
I-I/2" + L/16. The second stage shall be completed a
minimum of 30 days after concrete pour. Within five (5)
A
r-
B.
B,
D.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
F.
H.
J.
K.
L.
mi-nutes of sawing operation, joint shall be cl-eaned with
high pressure water blast to thoroughly remove residual
Latiance from sawcut surface. Flush in one direction
on1y.
Initial or "controf" transverse contraction joint shaLl- be
sawed at intervaLs as may be required to minimize
uncontroll-ed cracking as dlrected by the Architect.
Sawi-ng of the j oints shall conrmence as soon as the
concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing
wj-thout excessive ravel-ing, but no more than 24 hours.
AII joints shall be sawed before uncontroll-ed shrinkage
cracking takes p1ace.
During cool weather, the
only for the time requj.red
of the concrete durinq
Architect.
sawi-ng of joints may be delayed
to prevent tearing and raveling
sawinq as directed bv the
Vol-unteer cracks that occur in the pavement sha1l be
routed out with a power router to a l inch depth by I/4
i nr-h wi dl-h - r-1 erngd and f 1L1ed Wj th :rrrrrnrrod i ni nl f ilf ef
at the Contractor t s expense.
Concrete shall not be placed in adjacent lanes and trafflc
shall not be permitted on the pavement before afl joints
are sawed and sealed. In all cases, joints shalI coincide
with those in adjacent lanes to provide a continuous
straj-ght joint across the entire pavement width including
concrete curbs.
Suitable lighting shall be provided when
performed after dav]iqht hours.
sawing t5
No sawj-ng shall be done where volunteer cracks occur. If
a volunteer crack falfs within 5 feet of the location of a
proposed saw joint, the sawed joint shall be omitted.
Isolation joints shall be formed at structure approaches
as shown on the plans by means of a joint filler strip andjoint seaLer. The filler strip shall be firmly supported
in position by rnetal holders and end supports which sha1l
remain j.n place after completion of the pavement. During
placing and compacting the concrete, the metal- holder and
end supports shal-l be so secured as to insure against
movement of the filler strip and to maintain the strip in
position as i-ndicated on the standard drawing. Joint
filler shall extend the ful1 width of the concrete being
placed fess 7/4 inch on each end. Any concrete which
flows around the ends of the ioint fill shal-l be removed.
All- sawed joints shall be fi11ed with joint sealant, Dow-
Corning 888, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement or Dow-
Corning 890, for Portland Cement Concrete to Asphalt
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6
A.
B.
a
D.
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
3.8
?o
Pavement per manufacturer requirements i-mmediately prior
to placing backer rod and joint sealant, sandbJ'ast both
joint faces using compressor deLivering dry and oi1 free
li. at a minimum of l-20 Psi, 60 cfm- Thoroughly blow
joint clean using compressor delivering dry and oil free
air at 90 psi mi-ni-mum. Joint surfaces to be checked for
cleanliness (must be dust-free when running finger along
surface) . Install- backer rod. Blow debris off top of
backer rod. Install sealant and tool as shown. Place
"stops" at ends of sawcuts, where required, to prevent
seafant runout. Seal aII joints cl-eaned the same day.
FINI SHING
Area Paving: Screed.
SidewaLk Paving: Light broom, radius to 3/4 inch and
trowel- joint edges.
Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, radius edges to 3/4 inch'
Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces
immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with
manufacturert s instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING
A. The Owner wifl_ employ a qualified testing and inspection
agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test
ttporls during concrete placement. Sampli-ng and testing
for quality control may incl-ude the following:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 1"72' except modified
for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
a. Slump: ASTM C 143i one test at point of placement
for each compressive-strength test but no less
than one test for each day's pour of each type of
concrete. Additj-onal- tests will be required when
concrete consistencY chanqes.
b. Aj-r Content: ASTM C 23L, pressure method; one
test for each compressi-ve-strength tes! but no
less than one test for each day's pour of each
type of air-entrained concrete.
c. Concrete Temperature:ASTM C 1064; one test
hourly when air temperature j-s 40 deg f (4 deg C)
and below and when 80 deg' E (21 deg C) and above,
and one test for each set of compressive-strength
specj-mens.
d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of
three standard cyl inders for each
compressive-strength test, unless directed
otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for
Laboratory-cured test specimens except when
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING uzJzu - |
f.
field-cured test specimens are required.
One additi-ona1 test cylinder wil-l be taken during
cold weather and cured on slte under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set
for each day's pour of each concrete class
exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus
one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one
specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days,
and retain one specimen in reserve for Later
testing if required.
When frequency of testing witl provide fewer than five
strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct
testing from at feast five randomly selected batches
or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
When strength of field-cured cylinders j-s less than 85
percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders,
evaluate current operations and provide correctj-ve
procedures for protecting and curing the in-place
concrete,
Strength level of concrete will be considered
satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive
strength test results equal or exceed specified
compressive strength and no individual- strength test
result falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psl.
Test resul-ts wil-I be reported in writing to Architect,
concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of
testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall
contain the Project identification name and number, date
of concrete placement. name of concrete testing agency,
concrete type and c1ass, location of concrete batch in
paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete
mix proportions and materials, compresslve breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day
tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope t ex
other nondestructive device may be permitted but shal-l not
be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
Additional Tests: The testing agency wil-L make additional
tests of the concrete when test resul-ts indicate sJ-ump,
air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing
agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete
by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other
methods as di-rected.
The Contractor shall caII for inspection of concrete
controL joints prior to instaLlation of joint sealant.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
2.
B.
D.
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
3.11
A.
F. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date,
Location of pour, quantity, air temperature' and test
samples taken.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from
premature drying, excessive hot or coJ.d temperatures, and
mechanical injury.
SCHEDULES
Concrete Sidewalksi 3,000 psi 28 day concrete' 4 inches
thick, Light Broom Finish.
B. Parkj-ng Area Pavement: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete,
thickness as shown on the Drawings, Screed finish.
END OF SECTION 02520
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 9
t
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION O29OO - LANDSCAPING
rfti(1 l. - LTI,T\LI1AL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. AII landscaping is to be provided on a design/build basis,
per these specifications.
),.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provj-si-ons
in this section.
1.3 QUAIITY ASSURANCE
of Contract apply to work
A. U.S. Department of Agriculture Rufes and Regulations under
the Federal Seed Act.
B. American Associ-ation of Nurserymen, current edition of
"American Standard for Nursery Stock, " published by
American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., Title 26,
Colorado Nursery Act, as amended and/or Colorado Nursery
Act Regulations. If in confl-ict, Colorado State Law sha1l
rule.
C. Certificates of Inspection for Plants: AII necessary
State, FederaL and other inspection certiflcates shal1
accompany the invoice for each shipment of plant materials
as may be reguired by law, and showing source of origin.
D. Atl other appli-cabl-e Federal and Colorado l-aws as they
apply to plant materials.
E. Do not make substitutions: If specified landscape
material i-s not obtainable, submit to Archi-tect written
evidence of non-availability and proposal for use of
equivalent material . When authorized, adjustment of
contract amount wil-l be made.
F. Landscape Products:Packaqed standard oroducts with
manufacturert s certified analvsis.
G. Trees and shrubs: Provide plants that are grown in a
recognized nursery in accordance wi-th good horticultural
practice.Provide healthy, vigorous stock free of
disease, insects, e99s, Iarvae, and defects such as knots,
sun-scaLe, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement.
1. Sizes: Provide plants of sizes shown or specified.
Plants of larger size may be used if acceptable to
Architect, and if sizes of roots or root balls are
j-ncreased proportionately,
LANDSCAPING 02900 - r-
r.4
Inspection: Architect reserves the right to inspect
plants either at place of growth or at site beforeplanting, for compliance with requirements for name,
variety, size and quality.
1.The Archltect reserves the ri-ght to reject at any timeor place prior to final- acceptance al-L plant materialswhich in the Architect's opinion fail to meetspecifications. Inspection of material-s is primarily
for quality, size, and variety, but other requirementsare not waived even though visual- inspection resultsin approval . Pl-ants may be inspected where available;
however, i-nspection at the places of supply shalL not
preclude the right of rejection at the site or at a
later time prior to flnal acceptance.Rej ected
materiaLs shal-1 be removed from the site withi-n 24
hours.
The Contractor shall schedule inspection of plants, ateither the supplier or on site, to be completed in onevisit. Any further inspection required due to plants
being unavaj-Iable or rejected as not meetingspecifications shal] be charged to the Contractor atthe current hourly rate for Architect's personnel
cerforminq the inspection.
SUBMITTALS
Certification: Submit to Architect certificates of
inspection of manufacturer's or vendors certified analysis
for fertilizer and seed. Submit other data as may be
requested substantiating that materj.als comply with
specified requirements.
Maintenance Instructions: Submj-t typewritten i-nstructions
recommending procedures to be establ-ished by Owner for
mai-ntenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit
three (3) copies to the Owner and one (1) copy to the
Architect prior to expiration of the required maintenanceperiod.
Contractor shal1 request a review of maintenance
instructions with Owner and Architect to finalize
instructions and make certain instructions are
satisfactory to Owner and Contractor.
Samples: Submit, as called for, samples of materials as
specifled herein to Architect for review prior to
commencing landscape work.
1E DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 2
B.
D.
E.
F.
D.
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L.6
Packaged Mater j.al-s: Del-iver packaged materials j-n
containers showing weight, analysis and name of
manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during
delivery and storage.
Sod: Time delivery and/or installation so that sod wil-L
be placed within 36 hours after stripping. Protect sod
strips against drying and breaking.
Pl-ant Material-s: Provide freshly dug or containerlzed
plants. Do not prune trees or shrubs pri-or to delivery.
Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as
to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape.
Protect alL exi-sting trees to be transplanted as necessary
to ensure successful- transplanting.
Deliver plant materials after preparatj-ons for planting
have been completed and plant immediateJ-y. If planting is
deJ-ayed more than 6 hours after deJ-ivery, set plants in
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and
keep roots moi-st.
Do not remove container grown stock from containers until
planting time.
Label- at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with
a secureLy attached waterproof tag bearing a Iegible plant
name.
JOB CONDITIONS
Utilities: Determine locatlon of underground utilities
and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible
damage. Hand excavate as required.
Protect all trees, shrubs and other site components to be
saved with snow fencing and other high vi-sibllj-ty
material-s installed prior to the commencement of any site
work.
Existing trees to be transpJ-anted: Identify any site or
job conditions which wouLd interfere with successful
transplanting of existing trees and notify Archi-tect of
any such adverse condj-tions.
Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth
are encountered, such as rubble fil-1, adverse drainage
condi-tions, or obstructions, notify Architect before
^ 1 --.F i -^Prarrurrr9.
Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after
final grades are established and prior to planting lawns,
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 3
1.7
unLess otherwise acceptabLe to Architect. If tree and
shrub planting occurs after lawn work, protect lawn areas
and promptly repair damage to fawns resulting from
planting operations.
Coordinate with general contractor to keep access to the
buj-lding and the parking lot avail-able at all times.
WARRANTY
True to Name: The Contractor shall- guarantee all plants
to be true to name and to meet aII conditions of these
specifications. Any plant which is not true to name as
lndicated by form, Ieaf, fJ-ower, or fruiting
characteristics revealed within warranty perj-od shall be
replaced by Contractor, at Contractorrs exPense.
B. Warranty Graded Areas: For a period of one (1) year after
the date of final acceptance of the Project, guarantee
that no major settlement shall take place. ShouLd
settlement occur, fill and compact settled areas and
replant affected areas per these specifications.
(-Warranty Sodded and Seeded Areas: For a period of one (1)
ful1 year from the date of final acceptance of the
Project, agai-nst death, unsatisfactory growth' and bare
areas except for defects resulting from neglect by the
Owner, abuse or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or
incidents which are beyond the Contractor's control .
Warranty Pl-ants: Warranty new and transpJ-anted trees,
shrubs. vines, flowers and groundcover plants for one (1)
full year from the date of final- acceptance of the Project
against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth'
except for defects resulting from neglect by Owner' abuse
or damage by others, or unusual phenomena or incidents
which are beyond the Contractor' s controL. If
transplanted trees shall die within the warranty period'
replacement trees shafl be of the same species' with a 3"
caliper for deciduous trees, 6t height for Pinon Pines and
10' height for Ponderosa Pines.
E. Replacements: For a period of one (1) full year after the
date of final acceptance of work and at no additional cost
to the Owner, the Contractor shalL replace any plants that
have died or are partially dead, or that have lost their
natural shape due to dead branches or excessive pruning of
branches.
1. Inadequate or improper maintenance by the Owner shalL
not be cause for replacement provided the Contractor
shall- have submitted throughout the warranty period a
rnonthJ.y letter or report to the Owner on improper or
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
F.
D.
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 4
B.
a
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
inadequate maintenance
remedial actions.
nr.a /-l- r aaq and recommended
The warranty shaLL not be enforced shou1d any plant
material die due to vandalism.
Remove and replace plants found to be dead or in
unhealthy condi-tion during the warranty period. make
replacements durlng the growi-ng season. At the end of
the warranty period, replace any plant material which
isj-n poor health or of doubtful good health as
determined by the Architect, unless, in the opinion of
the Architect, it is advisabl-e to extend the warranty
period.
Another inspection will be conducted at the end of the
extended warranty period, if ?FIYr to determine
acceptance or rej ection,
Replacement planting is to be in accordance with these
specifications and its cost considered to be incl-uded
in the bid price. All areas damaged by replacement
operations are to be fully restored at the
Contractorrs expense to their original condition as
specified.
MAINTENANCE
Maintain existing tlees to be transplanted (after they
have been dug, balled and burlapped in accordance with AAN
standards) i-n Contractor's yard until time of replanting.
Begln maintenance of newly planted areas irnmediately after
planting.
1.8
Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants
acceptance but i-n no case less than 30 days.
1. Maintain trees, shrubs and other plants
cultivati-ng and weeding as required
growth. Tighten and repair stake and guy
reset trees, shrubs, groundcovers and
proper grades or vertical- positions as
Restore or replace damaged wrappings.
required to keep trees and shrubs and
free of i-nsects and disease.
until final
by pruning,
for healthy
supports and
ffowers to
required.
Spray as
other plants
Maintain sod for not less than 30 days after the date of
instal-l-ation and untif finaf acceptance, whichever is
longer, as may be required for acceptable establishment.
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 5
PART
)1
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
1
1
E.
F.
After 30 days of the maintenance period, fertiLize new
sod areas with 1 pound of actual nltrogen per 1000
square feet of sod area.
Maintain new sod areas by watering, fertilizing'
weeding, mowing, trimming, and other operations such
as rolling, regrading, and replanting as required to
establish grasses' free of eroded or bare areas.
Provide protection against disease and insect damage.
Maintain seeded areas as may be necessary for acceptable
erosion control and seed germination and emergence. (See
Section 3.6.B for final acceptance criteria.)
Maintain seeded areas by watering, controlling weed
growth, regrading, replanting and remulchlng as
required to j,nsure that seeded areas are in vigorous
growing condition and free of eroded areas. Fertilize
all seeded grass areas 30 days after germination with
specified fertilizer, at rate equal to L pound actuaf
nitrogen per 1000 s.f., and water thoroughly. Do not
fertilize wildflower/qrass seed areil
Apply Pre-Emergence Herbicide, dt manufacturer's
recommended rate, to all shrub beds at the concl-usion of
the 30 day maintenance Period.
2 - PRODUCTS
SOIL AMENDMENTS
Topsoil: Shal-l- be fertile, friable, sandy loam topsoil
and shall be obtained from a well-drained site. It shall
be without admixture of subsoil and shall be free of
stones over I L/2 inches in diameter, refuse, plants or
their roots, sticks, noxlous weeds, salts, soil sterifants
or other material- which would be detrimental- to plant
growth.
1. Topsoil sha1l not be delivered or used while in a
frozen or muddY condition.
2. Source: Upon request of the Architect, the Contractor
shall provide the foLLowing information:
a. Specific locations of property from which the
topsoil is to be stripped. If obtained from a
commercial supplier, the same is applicable.
b. Name and address of present Owner of property.
c. Test results showing topsoil analysis.
Topsoil as delivered to the site sha1l have an acidity
range of pH 6.0 to 7.5 and shall contain not less than
3t organic matter as determined by l-oss on ignition of
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 5
z.
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
moisture-free sampl-es dried at 100o Centigrade.
Topsoil shall have salt of l-ess than 2 mmhos,/cm and a
sodium absorptj-on ratio of l-ess than 12.
The Architect reserves the right to inspect topsoil at
its source to determine whether or not it meets the
requirements specified and to approve the depth to
whj-ch it may be stripped.
Topsoil shall meet the folJ-owing mechanical analysis:
Passinq ?Retalned %
60-40
B.Orqanic Matter (SoiI Preparation) :
1. Compost and "Repeat":Orsanic material for soil
preparation shaLl be a mixture of 752 Blue Ribbon
Compost and 252 Repeat, and sha11 be free from
subsoil, stones, plants or their roots' sticks, weed
stolons and seeds, high salt content and other
materiaLs harmful to plant life. The compost and
Repeat shal-l- be coarsely ground and thoroughly mixed
together to ensure an even composition. The mix shall
have an acidity in the range of pH 5.5 to pH 7.0 and
shalI meet the followinq mechanical analysis:
I Passinq? Retained
1-inch screen
1,/2-rnch. screen
No. 100 mesh sieve
2" screen
1tt screen
1/2" screen
#100 mesh sieve
100
97 - 100
100
90 - 100
50-80
0 - 15
0-0
0-3
40-60
U
0-10
20-50
85 - 100
Upon the request of the Architect, the Contractor
shal-l provide test resul-ts showi-nq mixture composition
and analysis.
Compost: Shal-l- be Blue Ribbon Compost' as supplied by
Age OId Organics, (303) 499-020I , or other supplier.
Materials with a salt reading (EC = mmhos/cm) above
three (3) shall not be used.
Repeat: Shall be as provided by A-1 Organics, (800)
255-4144. Conductivity shall be bel-ow 2.5 mmhos/cm,
organic content shall be above 458 in its undried
condition and pH shall be 4.5-5.0'
Superphosphate: Soluble mixture of treated minerals,
168 to 208 available phosphoric acid.
LANDSCAP I NG 02900 - ?
z.z
z.J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
?
A.
(-
E.
tr
B.
Commercial Fertilizer: For sod areas, provide a slow
release granular commercial fertilizer with an
analysis of 10-6-4. No fertilizer is required for
tree, shrub or perennial planting areas.
IVIU !UNE )
Fir Fiber Mul-ch: As provided by Far West Forests, (915)
966-3800 (submit sample) .
Pea Gravel: Shall be screened, washed aggregate, 1/4 inch
to 3/8 inch diameter (submit sample).
Rip Rap: Well-graded angular quarry stones, sound and
hard, resistant to water and weathering. Stones shal1 be
a minimum of 3"x3"x3"i 50t sha1l be 6"x6"x6" or larger, up
to 8"x8"x8" maximum (submit sample).
CobbLe Mulch. 4" to 6" diameter rounded river rock, white
greys, well-washed (submit sampl-e) .
Wood cellulose fiber mulch: Degradable green dyed wood
ceLluLose fiber or 1008 recycled long fiber pulp, free
from weeds or other foreign matter toxic to seed
germination and sultable for hydromulching.
Tackifier: For use with wood fiber mu1ch. Shall be R-
2400 PsyIIium-based tackifier/binder as manufactured by
Reclamare Company of Seattle, Washington. Apply at 60
Ibs /acre in accorqance with manufacturerts
recommendations .
PLANT MATERIALS
A list of plants to be provided shaLl be submitted to the
Architect on a design/bui1d basis, for final approval.
All plants:
Shal1 comply with recommendations and requirements of
the most recent ANSI 260.0 'Standard for Nursery
Stock" and as specified.
Shal-l be the species designated on the Drawings. Nosubstitutions wiII be accepted without the prior
written approval of the Architect. Contractor must
provide proof of non-availability.
Shall have a well- developed branch structure tlpical
of the size and species.
ShaLl have a wel-l--branched and vigorous root system
typical of size and species, free from roots girdling
the trunk and other defects.
LANDSCAPING 02900 - I
q
(^
D.
E.
G.
H.
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
F.
Shal1 be heatthy and vi-gorous ptants free from visual
defects, hail or mechani.cal injuries, plant diseases
and a 1l f orms of insect in f e st at i on unt il- f i-nal-
- ^^^^f -n^^
ah:l I ha f raehlrr drtrrrrverrfj qqY
contalner grown.
at time of deliverY excePt if
All trees:
1. ShaLl not have been pruned after sel-ection by the
Architect or Contractor at either the supplier nursery
or the Contractor's nursery except as otherwise
provided herein.
2. Shall have root batls of at least the mini-mum slzes
per ANSI standards for specified tree types.
AIl deciduous trees of one species used shaLl- exhibit
cultural uniformity, i.e. "matched, " in height, crown
width and shape, height to first branch and trunk taper.
For this reason it is desired that these trees be produced
by a single grower.
Deciduous Shrubs: Provide shrubs of the contai-ner size
and plant height or spread listed and with not less than
minimum number of canes reguired by ANSI standards-
Evergreen Shrubs: Provide evergreens of sizes listed.
Dimensions indicate minimum spread for spreading and semi-
spreading type evergreens. Provide everqreens with well--
balanced form complying with requirements for other size
rel-ationships to the primary dimension listed.
Sod: Sod shall be a Colorado-grown bl-end of 90? Twilight
TaIt Fescue and 10? Merit Kentucky Bluegrass, or approved
equal, complying with applicable Colorado and FederaL
regulations. The sod sha11 have a vigorous and healthy
root system and top growth and shall have been regularly
fertilized, watered, mowed. sprayed and shall be free from
objectionabfe weeds and,/or grasses. Sod strip shall have
from 5/8th-inch minimum to one inch maximum thickness of
soil adhering to root system, cut into strips 19-inch
maximum width by 4 feet minimum length. Sod which has
dried out, or sod with adhering soil which breaks, tears
or crumbles away will not be accepted. Sod cut for more
than 36 hours wiII not be accepted. Sod shall be kept
moist, protected from sun, heat or wind in transport and
after deli-very. Prior to cutting, the sod shal-L be evenly
mowed for a blade length of at least one inch but not more
than 2 inches.
Grass Seed Mix: Low Grow Mix, as provided by Arkansas
Valley Seed, (303) 320-7500. Used in both irrigated and
non-irriqated areas.
I,ANDSCAPING 02900 - 9
2.4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
T
T
I
I
T
I
I.
A.
B.
D.
Quantities of bulk seed required to provide 40 Ibs.
P. L. S. ,/Ac. sha.l-l be calculated f rom purity and germj-nation
percentage rates listed on the lot tag of seed actually
purchased using the following 2 formulas:
Purity percentage x germination = P.L.S. percentage
lbs P.L.S. specified per Ac. = Bulk lbs required per Ac.
P.L.S. percentage
Wildflower Seed Mix: Wil-dflower mix sha1l be provided by
the Owner and used at the rate recommended by the
manufacturer. This wildflower mix shafl be bLended with
10 lbs. P.L.S./Ac. Scaldis Hard Fescue and uniformly
applied.
MlSCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS
Tree wrapping material shal1 be first quality, 4 inch
wide, bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe
paper, brown in co1or, specifically manufactured for tree
wrapping.
Stakes shall- be 8 foot x 1-1'/2 inch diameter wolmanized
lodgepole pine for new deciduous trees; !0'x2" diameter
wol-manj-zed lodgepole pine for transplanted deciduous
trees; and 30" steel frT" stakes for evergreen trees'
Trees shaLf be secured to stakes using minimum 2 inch wide
non-stretching, green webbing with grommets for attachment
of wire between strap and stake; webbing shall be
appropriately sized to restrain tree (including large
transplanted pines, on which wire looped through a rubber
hose section may be substituted if necessary) for fuI1
warranty period. The strap shalL be of sufficient Iength
in relation to tree caliPer so that grommets do not touch
trunk. Wire shalI be 1'2 gauge galvanized steel. Guy
wires for evergreen trees shall have a 1/2" diameter, 24"
long white PVC tube placed over the wire, as per the
detail shown on the plans.
1. Any stakj-ng which is unacceptable to the Architect
shatl be replaced until acceptable and the costs for
replacement shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Geotextile Fabric: Shal1 be Polyspun 300, gray color.
Pre-Emergence Herbicide: ShaII be "Treffan" as
manufactured by Elanco Conpany or aPproved substitution.
Apply as per manufacturer's recommendations for weed
control .
(-
LANDSCAPI NG 02900 - 10
cL.
E.I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
Qtoo l Ec'lrrar. Qh-= l I 'rra Prrorczrnvv r\]
14 gauge wj-th line stakes and
B1ack color.
steel edging, 4 inch depth,
spl-icer stakes as provided.
F.Erosion control nettinos:Use heavy jute mesh of
unbl-eached single jute yarn in a uniform open pl-ain weave.
Yarn shal-l- be of Loose.l-y twisted construction having an
average twist of not less than 1.6 turns per inch with
thickness vari-ation not more than one half its normaL
diameter. Use width as specified on the plans. Vleight of
cloth to average L.22 pounds (4' width) or 1.83 pounds (6'
width) per linear vard with a + 5? tol-erance.
Erosion control staples: Al-1 staples shall be 8" minimum
length "u" shaped of .091 minimum diameter wire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINISH AND FINE GRADING
A. Positive Surface Drainage: The Contractor shall finish
and fine grade the project area to establish an even and
well-matched qrade over the entire surface.Posi-tive
surface drainage shaLl be assured, and there shal-L be no
depressions, subsequent settling or irregularities in the
finished grade.
B. Transltional Areas: At any transitional point or l-i-ne
where one plane intersects another, such as from a sloping
area or berm to a level- area, a smooth and gentle
transiti-on shall be made. There shal1 be no abrupt
changes 1n grade unless specifical.J.y noted otherwise.
3.2 AMENDMENTS FOR SOIL PREPARATION
A. Mix specified soil- amendments and fertilizers at rates
specified.
1.Soil- Preparation: Schedule of soil mixes and soil
amendments for various project areas are listed below.
Tree, Shrub, Groundcover, and Perennial Bed Areas:
Provide not less than the following quantities of
specified amendment materials:
Specified Organic Matter:
Specified Topsoil: Three
4 cubic yards per 1000
i nnh rl ant- h4.rv.r svF err.
b. Sodded Areas: Provide not less than the foll-owinqquantities of specified amendment materials:
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 1r-
Specified Organic Matter:
5-t-.
4 cubic yards per 1000
Speci-fied Topsoil: Three inch depth.
Commerci-al Fertilizer (10-6-4) : At manufacturerrs
recommended rate.
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
Superphosphate:
rate.
At manufacturer's recommended
c. Grass and Wildflower./Grass Seeded Areas: Add 3
cubic yards of specified organic matter per l-000
D..L.
3.3 SO]L PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shal1 complete all finished grading of all
landscaped areas before winter begins regardless of
whether plant materials can be planted. No plant material-
shall- be instalLed on frozen ground.
B. AIl construction debris shalL be removed prior to final
soil preparation. At no time shall waste products of
construction be spread in areas to be landscaped.
C. Existing soil shall not be compacted in excess of 908
Standard Proctor Density, as tested prior to final soif
preparation. Should this density be exceeded, the top 8"
of existing soil shal-f be disced to reduce compaction, and
resettled to achieve 908 compactj-on.
D. AII planting areas shall have specified amendment
materials spread evenly over entire area and thoroughly
incorporated, by disking or rototilling, to a depth not
less than six (6) inches. The areas shall then be raked
and settled, removing aLl coarse lumps, rocks, sticks,
roots and weeds. The soil surface shall be smooth, loose
and of fine texture' stayi-ng one inch below all paving
edges in seeded or sodded areas and four inches below all
paving edges in shrub bed areas.
1. Restore areas to specified condition if eroded or
otherwise disturbed after fine grading and prior to
Planting.
E. Wildflower and Dryland Grass Seeded Areas shall have soils
amendments spread evenly and incorporated thoroughly into
the soil to a depth of not fess than six (6) inches.
Seedbed shall be in a roughened condition for seeding,
with soil lumps ranging up to one (1) inch, maximum. All
debris shal-l be removed from the seed-bed.
TANDSCAPING vz},uv - Lz
1.
z-
A.
B,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4
1.Restore seeded areas to specified condition i-f eroded
or otherwj-se disturbed after seeding.
PLANTING
The Contractor shall l-ocate and stake all trees and the
shrub beds according to locations shown on the Drawings '
Each tree location stake shall- have the name and size
clearlv printed on the stake.AlI pl-antinq stake
Iocations shalt be reviewed and approved by the Architect
prior to planting operations. The Contractor shal-l- make
modifications in stake focation as directed by the
Archi-tect.
Plant Protection and Del-iverv:
A11 plant materiaL shall be protected from the time of
digging to the time of finaL acceptance from injury,
excessive drying by winds, improper ventllation,
overwaterj-ng, freezing, high temperatures' or any
other conditlon damaging to the plant. Any plants
showing evi-dence of poor care, or which are molded,
mil-dewed, wilted or dried out shal-1 be rejected.
Colored waxes or other materials whi-ch coat the aerial
parts of the plant shall not be acceptable. Removal
of primary parts of the plant shalL not be acceptable.
Removal of primary buds and/or shoots (terminal buds
and first order leaders) of plants also is not
acceptable.
Plant materials sha1l be planted on the day of
delivery if possible. A11 plants not planted on the
day of delivery shall be placed in a temporary
nursery, kept moist. shaded and protected from sun and
wind. If balled and burlapped plants are not planted
on the day of delivery, they shal1 be heeled-in
immediately, kept moist and protected with damp soil'
sawdust, or other acceptable material. AII plants
shall be planted within 48 hours after delivery.
Plants sha11 not be bound with wire or rope that may
damage the bark or break branches. Pl-ants shafl be
Iifted and handfed from bottom of ball, or container.
Plants with balls that are loose, cracked, broken, or
completely dry or plants with trunks Loose in the bal-l
before or during planting operations wil-1 not be
accepted and shall be removed from the site at
Contractor's expense wlthin 24 hours.
Excavation of Plantinq Pit
1. A11 plant pits shalf be centered on the location stake
and shall be excavated j-n a cylindrical shape wi-th
vertical sides and flat bottom. The depth of the
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 13
plant pit shall be measured from the finished grade of
soil-, not mulch. The base of all root baLls shall be
placed on undisturbed soil-.
Trees: The diameter of all tree pits shall be a
minj-mum of 24 inches greater than the diameter of the
bal-l- or spread of the roots. The depth of all treepits shali- be 2 j-nches less than the depth of the ball
in porous and well- drained soils and 3 inches l-ess
than ball depth in tight and poorly drained soils.
Shrubs: The diameter of all shrub pits shalf be twice
the diameter of the container, or more. The depth of
all shrub pits shal-I be 2 inches less than depth of
bal.l- or root systemi except that juniper pits shall be
shallower, as shown on the detail-.
Vines, Flowers and Groundcovers: The di-ameter of all
vine and ground cover pits shall be 12 inches greater
than the rootbaII.
D.PLant Install-ation Procedure
Planting, Staking, Pruning and Wrappi-ng
a. Plants shall be set in the center of the pit on Ithe undlsturbed subqrade.
Immediately after setting in the pit, aII non-
biodegradable materials shall be completely
removed from the ball and trunk, includi-ng but not
limited to plastic, metal, wire, wood, cardboard,paper, fiber, treated burlap and twine. The only
exception shall be that the bottom (not sides) of
fiber pots and metal containers, and the bottom
one-third of the sides of wire baskets shall be
allowed to remaln.
The Contractor shall untie and fold back any
untreated burlap to one-hal-f the depth of the
baIL.
This container removal and subsequent plant
handling shall be done in such a manner so as notto injure the plant root system, disturb the soilbal-l or in any rday cause harm or stress to the
plant.
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
If the root system of a container
become container-bound, the roots
cut vertically on four sides ofprior to planting.
AII plants shal1 be placed and
straight as the pit is filled with
Any plant which is not upright andfinal acceptance wil] be rejected.
grown plant has
shal1 be gently
the root ball
kept plumb andbackfill mix.
plumb prior to
LANDSCAPING
h
02900 - 14
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
After pfacing plant in the Pit, the hole around
the plant root system shal-l be hal-fway backfilled
wi-th specif ied mi-x and any large air pockets
removed by hand with the b1unt, handle end of a
shoveL or other such hand tooL.
If the Architect determines that the balL is
excessively dry, the Contractor shafl- then insert
a deep watering devlce into the ball- at a 450
angle every 8 inches for one minute. The pit
shal-l- then be completely fiLled with backfi-Il mj'x
and compacted again wi-th the shovef.
No mechanical compacti-on will be allowed.
The pit shall then be watered bY
saturatinq the backfill.
thoroughly
d. Prune, thin out and shape trees and shrubs in
accordance with horticultural practice. Prune
trees to retain required height and spread'
Unless otherwise directed by Architect, do not cut
tree leaders.
Remove only injured
flowerinq trees.
or dead branches from
Prune shrubs to retain natural character.
Remove and replace excessively pruned or
mi-sshapened stock resulting from improper pruning.
Rough prune all existing deciduous trees to remaj'n
near north property line after regrading
operations, in order to establish a more pleasing
form for each tree.
Wrap deciduous tree trunks. Start at ground and
co.ret trunk to height of second branch and
securely attach with tape or cord at aPproximately
24 inch intervals along trunk.
Before wrappi-ng, inspect tree trunks for injury,
improper pruning and j-nsect infestation and take
corrective measures.
e.I
I
I
I
I
I
I
No tree trunk shall
before November L.
All deciduous trees
15. Wrappings shall
by April 15.
be wrapped after APriJ- 15 nor
shaLl be wrapped bY November
be removed by the Contractor
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 15
Mulch Type and Depth
immedi-ate1y after planting, as shown
details.
as Fol-l-ows:
Provide not less than specified thickness of mulch and
finish level- with adiacent fi-nished qrades.
Trees in lawn areas and perennials: Fir fiber
mulch (with no geotextile fabric) at a fuII three
inch depth for trees and I7/2 inch depth for
perennials, after settlement and compaction.
Shrubs and Groundcover Plants: Pea gravel mulch
over geotextile fabric at a ful-l three inch depth
after settl-ement and compaction.
Cobble Mulch: Install closely-fitted cobbl-e over
geotextile fabric to depth of 4"-6". Scatter pea
gravel in voids to screen fabric.
Rip Rap: Instal-l- rip rap over geotextile fabric as per
manufacturer's recommendations and as per detail. Protectplant material during installation. Relay any displacedfabric and replace any fabric torn during installation in
accordance with these plans and specifications.
SEEDING AND SODDING
Seeding
1. Do not use wet seed which is moldv or otherwise
damaged in transit or storage. Defiver seed to thejobsite in the original unopened containers and submit
the certified IabeLs to the Architect.
2. Grass Seed shall be planted only in the period from
September 15 to May I, in order to maximize the
potential for successful- installation.V'liIdf f ower
seed/grass seed blend shall be planted only from
November 1 to May 1.
3. Seed immediately after preparation of bed.
4. Seed indicated areas within contract linits and areas
adjoining contract limits disturbed as a result of
construction operations.
5. Perform seeding operations when the soil is dry and
when winds do not exceed 5 mifes per hour velocity.
6. Apply seed with a drill seeder. Install seed evenly
by drilling equal guantities in 2 directions, at right
angles to each other.
'l . After seeding, mat or drag surface of soil lightly to
incorporate seed into top !/8" of soil.
8. Sow not Less than the quantity of the seed specified.
9. Protect seeded areas against erosion by spreading
specified mulch and tacki-fier after compLetion of the
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1_
b.
1
F.
ft.
Stake trees
on planting
?5
The mulch
02900 - 16LANDSCAPING
seeding operations (spread uniformly)
l-,
z.
q
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
shall be appJ-ied by the hydraulic method at the rate
of forty pounds (40 lbs.) of wood fiber per thousand
square feet (1750 lbs./acre) and at 60 ]bs. per acre
of speclfied tackifier. The mulch shall- penetrate the
soif slightly and provide a thin and open water
insoluble film when dry.
10. Protect seeded areas against hot, dry weather or
drying winds by applying the specifled mulch not more
than twenty-four (24) hours after completi-on of the
seeding operation.
11. Erosion control netting shall be instal-led around all
rotary pop-up heads in seeded areas. The 4'x4' square
(16 square feet) netting is to be centered around each
head. Pin or staple securely at alL corners or as
required.
12. Uniformly fertitize qrass areas with specifled
fertilizer at the rate of 1 pound actual nitrogen per
1000 sq. ft.30 days after germination, and water
thoroughly. Do not fertj-1ize wildflower/grass seed
areas.
Soddi-nq
Preparation for Sodding: Sodded areas sha11 be free
of debris, and/or rocks larger than 1'/2" which may
hinder tilling, sodding, finish grading, or subsequent
operations. Accumulated debrj-s shaff be disposed of
offsite. Perform finish grading required to maintain
drainage into catch basins, drainage structures' etc.,
and as required to provide a smooth, well- contoured
surface prior to proceedj-ng.
Finish grades: Ensure finished grades of sod are such
that drainage of storm and irrigation waters will
occur and ponding of water wi-11- be prevented'
Irrigation Heads: Adjust irrlgation heads to proper
watering height according to depth of the sod
materiaL, but lower than compacted grass blade height,
to enable lawn mowers to freely cut grass without
damage to sprinkler systern.
SoiI Preparation: Do not begin sod placement until
the Architect has approved soil preparations.
Sod Placement:
Lay sod on soil which is slightly moist, with ends
and sides of sod pieces butted tightly together,
and laid in continuous rows with longest
dimensions parallef to contours.
Stagger vertical joints between sod strips and
compact by rolling so sod will be incorporated
with ground surface, and insuring tight joi-nts
between adjacent pieces.
Add topsoil along exposed edges to match adlacent
grade. Feather topsoil out approximately 1 foot
from edqe of sod.
LANDSCAP ING 02900 - 11
d. Lay sod flush with adjacent walks, curbs, etc-
6. Watering: Water sod upon completion of convenient
work areas until installation is complete and
irrigation system can be operated under fuI1 control .
Water sufficiently to moisten subsoil at l-east 2"
deep, and in a manner not to cause erosion or damage
to adjacent finished surfaces.
Fertilizing: Distribute specified chemicaf fertilizer
uniformly 30 days after installation at manufacturer's
recommended rate.
Restoration and Cleaning
Restoration and Repair: Properly repair sprinkler
head or other irrigation system components, or other
underground pipe or electric wiring damaged by this
work.
Excess Materj-als and Debris: Remove pa1lets, unused
sod, and other debris from the project site. Cl-ean
paved areas over which operations have been conducted.
D.Protection
1. Protection of Seeded and Sod Areas: Provide barri-ers
as required to prevent pedestrian or vehicular traffic
over newly sodded and seeded areas until completion
and final accePtance of the work.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE
Final Acceptance:within ten days of Contractor's
notification that the entire Project is complete,
Architect will review installation. If final acceptance
is not given, the Architect will prepare a punch list of
pending items which, uPon completion by Contractor and
subsequent review and approval, will signify final
acceptance. lhe punch list items for correction shall be
completed by the Contractor within 10 calendar days from
the date issued.
B. Final Acceptance, Seeded Areas: The seeded areas sha11
receive final- acceptance on the basis of having uniform
grass growth over all the seeded areas.Acceptable
uniform grass growth shall be defined as when the
scattered bare spots, not greater than one square foot' do
not exceed 5t of the irrigated seeded area and 20? of the
non-irrigated seed area.
3.'T CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During landscape work, keep all pavements cl-ean and work
areas in an orderlY condition-
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
2.
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 18
B.I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
Protect landscape work and plant materials from damage due
to landscape operations, operations by other contractors
and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection of the
landscaping during the installation and maintenance
periods. Treat, repair, or repLace damaged landscape work
as directed.
END OF SECTION 029OO
LANDSCAPING 02900 - 19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
SECTION O33OO - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General- and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Speciflcation Sections, apply to this Sectj-on.
L.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies cast-in place concrete, including
formwork, rei.nforcing, mix design, placement procedures,
and finishes.
B. Cast-in-pface concrete includes the following:
1. Foundations and footings.
2. Slabs-on-grade.
3. Foundati-on wa1Is.
4. Equipment pads and bases.
Refated Sections: The following Sections contarn
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving"
for concrete paving and walks.
2. Dj-visj,on 2 Section "Storm Sewerage" for inlet
structure concrete,
3. Division 3 Section "Concrete Reinforcement" for
reinforcing materials.
].. 3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of
the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for proprietary materials and items,
including reinforcement and forming accessories'
admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems'
curi-ng compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others
if requested by Architect.
C. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating,
bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Comply with
ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced concrete structures" showing bar schedules,
stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of
concrete reinforcement.Include special reinforcing
required for openings through concrete structures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE O33OO - 1
I.4
PART
z-L
z.z
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
D.Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix
deslgn test.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the
following codes, specifications, and standards' except
where more stringent requirements are shown or speclfied:
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301,
for Structural Concrete for Buildj-ngs. "
ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements
" Speci fications
for Reinforced
Concrete. "
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "ManuaL of
Standard Practi-ce. "
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a testing agency
acceptable to Architect to perform materi-aI evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixes.
Material-s and install-ed work may require testing and
retesting at any time during progress of Work. Tests'
including retesting of rejected materials for installed
Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.
2 - PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIAIS
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber,
meta1, or another acceptable materiaL. Provide lumber
dressed on at least two edges and one si-de for tight fit.
RE]NFORCING MATERIALS
A.Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A82-85, Grade 60, deformed.
B. SteeL Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steef.
C. We1ded Wire Fabrlc: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. I
D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers'
and other devices for spacing, supporting. and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wj-re fabric in place. Use
wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/II
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates:ASTM C 33 and as specJ-fied.
I
I
I
I
ICAST-IN.PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2
l_.
z-
A.
B.
D.
E'
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.A
Provide aggregates from
r-i.\71^rafa
Vrlater: Potable.
s rncr-Le source for exposed
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of
concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods as specified in ACI 301-. For the triaf
batch method, use an independent testlng agency acceptable
to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mj-x
rlo< i rrn <
1. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality
control testing.
2. Lirnit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of
cement content by weight.
Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix
for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start
of Work. Do not begin concrete production untj-I proposed
mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.
Design mixes to provi-de normal weight concrete with the
following properties as indicated on drawings and
schedules:
Interior and Exterior Flatwork: 3500-psi and 4000-psi'
respectively, 28-day compressive strength;
water-cement ratio, 0.50 maximum, 6 sack mix, 5g-79
air, exterior; 2&-44 air, i-nterior.
Caissons and Foundation llialls: 3000-psi and 400O-psi,
respectiveJ,y, 28-day compressive strength;
water-cement ratio, 0.55 maximum, 5 L/2 sack mix, 5? -
7t air (caissons) and 2% - 4? air (foundation wal-fs).
Slump Limits: Proportion
concrete slump at point of
1. Not more than 4 inches2. Not more than 7 inches
and design mixes to result in
placement as foLLows:
for fl-atwork and foundations.
for calssons.
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mi-x desj-gn adjustments may
be requested by Contractor when characteristics of
materiaLs, job conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect.
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength
results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect
before using in Work.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
2.5 CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete:
94, and as specified.
Comply with requirements of ASTM C
When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C)
and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery
time from l-I/2 hours to '1 5 minutes, and when air
temperature is above 90 deg F (ZZ deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART
<l
A.
3 - EXECUTION
GENERAL
Coordinate the i-nstallation of joint materiafs, vapor
retarder,/barrier, and other related materials with
nl ar:emenf of fofms and feinfofgi n.r stecl
FORMS
General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain
formwork to support vertical, l-ateral, static, and dynamic
Ioads that might be applied until concrete structure can
support such foads. Construct formwork so concrete
members and structures are of correct size, shape,
alignment, elevation, and position, Maintain formwork
construction tolerances and surface irreqularities
complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
3.2
1.Provide Class C tolerances for concrete surfaces.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
A.
Construct forms to sizes, shapes, 1ines, and dimensions
shown and to obtain accurate al-ignment, location, grades,
J.evel, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for
openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings,
rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
buLkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features
required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain
required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup
at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or
prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or
wrecking plates where stripping may darnage cast concrete
surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where
slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms
on1y. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets,
recesses, and the like for easy removal .
PLACING REINFORCEMENT3.3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4
B.
a
D.
A.
D.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
l
I
I
I
3.4
r\ /r^*^*^ l .6. \JErlY'J- CtJ- .Complv with Concrete Reinforcing SteeI
Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing
Bars, " for detai.Ls and methods of reinforcement placement
and supports and as sPecifieci.
Clean rej-nforcement of foose rust and mi11 scale' earth,
ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with
concrete -
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement
against displacement. Locate and support reinforclng by
metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hanqersr as
approved by Architect.
Pl-ace reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as
indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space' and
securely ti-e bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement
in position during concrete placement operations. Set
wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward
exposed concrete surfaces.
Install wel-ded wire fabric in lengths as J-ong as
practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at feast one fu1l mesh
and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining
widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
JOINTS
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction
joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the
structure, as acceptable to Architect.
Provide keyways at l-east 1--1 /2 inches deep in construction
joints in walfs and slabs and between wa1ls and footings.
Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be
used for s1abs.
C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main
reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints except as indicated otherwise' Do not continue
reinforcement through sides of strip placements.
Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will
be joined with fresh concrete.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: construct lsofation
joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between
slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestals, foundation wall-s, grade beams, and other
locations, as indicated.
F. Contraction (control-) Joints in slabs-on-Grade: construct
contraction joints in slabs-on-grade to form panels of
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
n;tterns as shown. Use
tne-fourth of slab depth.
saw cuts I/8 inch wide by
Contractj-on joints in unexposed fLoor sfabs may be
formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slabfinishing as may be safely done without dislodging
2 f'rf'r r 6d a I a
If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not
exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to
conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column
centerlines, half bays, third bays).
3.5 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Forms for Slabs:Set edge forms, buLkheads, and
intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and contours i-n finished surfaces. Provide and
secure units to support screed strips using strike-off
templates or compacting-type screeds.
PREPARING FORM SURFACES
General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved,
nonresidual, 1ow-VOC, form-coating compound before placing
reinforcement,
Do not al1ow excess form-coating material to accumulate in
forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces
against which fresh concrete wilL be placed. Apply
according to manufacturerrs instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
Inspection: Before placing concrete, j-nspect and complete
formwork instalLation, reinforcing steel, and items to be
embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installati-on of their work.
General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring,
Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete, " and as
specified.
3.6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
A.
A.
B.
D.
Deposit
thi-ckness
that has
weakness.
provide
a-l1t, /- rar a
concrete continuously or in layers of such
that no new concrete will be placed on concrete
hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of
If a section cannot be placed continuously,
construction joints as specified.Deposit
to avoid segregation at its final l-ocation.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in
horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner
to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
consists of several layers, place each layer wh11e
preceding layer is stiLf ptastic to avoid cold joints'
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating
equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or
tamping. Use equipment and procedures for
consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside
forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uni-formly spaced locations no farther than the visible
effectiveness of the machine.Place vibrators to
rapidly penetrate pJ-aced layer and at least 6 inches
into preceding 1ayer. Do not insert vibrators into
lower }ayers of concrete that have begun to set' At
each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consol-idate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items
without causing mix to segregate.
Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolj-date concrete
slabs in a continuous operation, within fimits of
construction joints, until compJ-eting placement of a panel
or section.
1. Consol-idate concrete during placement operat:-ons so
that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners'
2. Bring sl-ab surfaces to correct 1evel with a
straiqhtedge and strike off. Use bull floats or
darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows'
Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning
finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs
during concrete Pl-acement.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of' ACI 306
and as folIows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,
freezi-ng actions, or low temperatures.
When aj-r temperature has fallen to or is expected to faff
below 40 deg F (4 deg C) , uniformly heat water and
aggregates before mi-xing to obtain a concrete mixture
temperature of not Less than 50 deg F (10 deg c) and not
more than 80 deg F (2'7 deg C) at point of placement'
1. Do not use frozen materiafs or materiafs containing
ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade
or on subgrade containing frozen material-s.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materi'als
containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators
unless otherwj.se accepted in mix designs.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7
3.8
Hot-Weather Pl-acement: When hot weather conditions exi-st
that would impaj-r quality and strength of concrete' place
concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified-
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete
temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32
deq C) . Mixing water may be chi-LLed or chopped ice
may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is caLculated to totaf amount of
mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete
is Contractor's option.
Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it
becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will, not
exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before
embedding in concrete.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
Rough-Formed Fini-sh: Provide a rough-formed finish on
formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view i-n the
finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is
the concrete surface having texture imparted by
form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective
areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections
exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of wa11s, horizontal
offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed
surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface
treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unfess otherwise indicated.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic sfab
surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered
with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tife'
paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation
using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling
when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is
moved over surface. ConsoLidate concrete surface by
final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces
to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) ]-'7
(floor Levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155.
Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph
through applied floor covering system-
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
A.
A.
CAST- IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8
1.
B.
B.
B.
t
t
t
T
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. 10
A
3. 11
A.
Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to
exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps' and
elsewhere as indicated.
Immediately after float fi-nishj.ng, sLightLy roughen
concrete surface bv broominq with fiber-bristle broom
perpendicuLar to main traffi-c route.Coordinate
required final fini-sh with Architect before
:nnl i z--rii nns}/t-*+vqefv^r.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
Filling In: Fill- in hotes and openj-ngs l-eft in concrete
structures for passage of work by other trades' unl-ess
otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades i-s
in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to
blend with in-p1ace construction. Provide other
miscellaneous concrete filling shown or requj-red to
compLete Work.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by
stripping forms while concrete is stifl green and by
steeL-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with
corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded'
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:Provide machine and
equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set
anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at
correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates
of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature
drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot'
dty, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid
moisture loss before and during finishing operations with
an evaporatj-on-control material. Apply accordinq to
manufacturer's instructions after screeding and buI1
floating, but before power floating and troweling.
start inj-tial curing as soon as free water has disappeared
from concrete surface after placing and finishing'
Weather permitting, keep continuously moj-st for not Less
than 7 days.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curi-ng compound, by
moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curinq, or by
combining these methods, as specifj-ed.
D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by coveri-ng
with water.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive
cover, thoroughly saturate cover wi-th water, and keep
continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide
coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4-inch
Iap over ad; acent absorptj-ve covers.
E.Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:
1.Cover concrete surfaces with molsture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable
width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and
sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immedj-ate1y
repair any hoJ-es or tears during curing period using
cover material and waterproof tape.
Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on
exterj-or s1abs, walks, and curbs as follows:
Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as
final finishing operations are complete (within 2
hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared) 'Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power
spray or roller according to manufacturer t s
directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within 3 hours after initial- application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
period.
Use membrane curing compounds that wiIl not affect
surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied
di-rectlv to concrete.
REMOV]NG FORMS
Generaf: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such
as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of
the work, may be removed after cumufatively curing at not
Less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing
concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing
and protection operations are maintained.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam
soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements' may
not be removed in less than 1'4 days or until concrete
hasattained at least 75 percent of design minimum
compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential
compressive strength of in-p1ace concrete by testing
field-cured specimens rePresentative of concrete location
or members .
Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement
only if shores and other vertical supports have been
arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without
loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
3.12
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
I
t
T
I
1
F
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10
,l
Et
B.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
J. L5
A
3.L4
A.
REUSING FORMS
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the
Work. Split, f rayed, de.l-aminated, or otherwise damaged
form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed
surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified
for new formwork.
When forms are extended for successive concrete pJ-acement,
thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and
tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure jolnt to
avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed
concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective
areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms,
when acceptable to Architect.
Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland
cement to 2-1 /2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. L6 mesh
sieve, using only enough water as required for handling
and placlng.
Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over I/4 inch
in any dimension, and hol-es left by tie rods and bolts
down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less
than 1 inch. Make edoes of cuts oerpendicular to the
a-a'\naraia ctlriaa-c Thoroughly c1ean, dampen with
water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with
bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bondj-ng
agent has dried.
c. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete
having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to
satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color
and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles.
honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the
surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot
be removed by cleaning. FLush out form tie holes and fj-ll
with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs securedj-n place with bonding agent.
1. Repair conceal"ed formed surfaces, where possible,
containing defects that affect the concrete's
durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and
replace t.he concrete.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such
as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface
tolerances specified for each surfac€ and finish. Correct
CASTIIN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11
A
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
F.
low and hj-gh areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by
using a template having the required slope.
1.Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects
that affect the concrete's durabil-ity.Surface
defects incl-ude crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01
inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or
compJ-etely through nonreinforced sections regardless
of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets,
and other objectlonabl-e conditions.
correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding
after concrete has cured at feast 1-4 days.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or
immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with
patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to bfend into
adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds
may be used when acceptabJ-e to Architect.
Repaj-r defective areas, except random cracks and
single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter' by
cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove
defective areas with clean, square cuts and exPose
reinforcj-ng steel with at least 3/4-inch cfearance afl
around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
patchj-ng concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix
patching concrete of same materials to provide
concrete of same tlpe or class as orj-ginal concrete.
Place, compact, and finish to bl-end with adjacent
finished concrete. Cure in same manner as ad'iacent
.-/,..\r.r/-r6iA
Perform structural repairs with prior approval of
Archltect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy
adhesive and mortar.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to
acceptance of Architect.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
Owner wil-L employ a testing agency to perform tests and
submit test reports.
Sampllng and testing for quality control
placement may include the following,
Archltect.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C I'12,
for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
during concrete
as directed by
except nodified
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
a. Stump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge
for each day's pour of each type of concrete;
additional tests when concrete consi-stency seems
to have changed.
b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for
lightweight or normaf weight concrete; ASTM C 231 ,
pressure method for normal- weight concrete,' one
ior each day's pour of each type of air-entrained
/-/\t.\r^rAt-6
c. Concrete Temperature:ASTM C 1064 i one test
hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C)
and below, when 80 deg F (2'7 deg C) and above, and
one test for each set of compressive-strength
specimens.
d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of
four standard cYlinders for each
compressJ.ve-strength test, unl-ess otherwise
directed. Motd and store cylinders for
laboratory-cured test specimens except when
field-cured test specimens are required.
2. When freguency of testing will provide fewer than five
strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct
testing from at least five randomly selected batches
or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85
percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders'
evaluate current operations and provide corrective
procedures for protecting and curing the in-pIace
concrete.
4. Strength levef of concrete will be consi-dered
satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutr-ve
strength test results equal or exceed speci-fied
compressive strength and no individuaf strength test
result fal-l-s below speclfied compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
Test results wi-11 be reported j-n writing to Architect,
Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor
within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive
strength tests shaII contaj-n the Project identlfication
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of
concrete testing service, concrete type and class,
location of concrete batch in structure, design
compressive strength at 29 days, concrete mix proportions
and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of
break for both ?-day tests and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer. sonoscope, or
other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not
be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection'
E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional
tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13
specified concrete strengths and other characteristica
have not been attained in the structure, as directed by
Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
END OF SECTION O33OO
I
t
I
III
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
tCAST-IN-PI.ACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14
A.
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
sEcrroN 05120 -STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
Generaf and Supplementary Conditions and Divisj-on 1
Specifj-cation Sectj-ons, apply to this Section.
1..2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of
structural steel- work, as shown on drawings including
schedules, notes, and detail-s showing size and location of
members, typical connections, and types of steel requJ-red.
1. Structural- steel is that work defined in American
Institute of Stee1 Construction (AISC) "Code of
Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings.
2. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified
elsewhere in Division 5.
3. Refer to Division 3 for anchor bolt install-ation in
concrete. Divj-sion 4 for anchor bolt installation in
masonry.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
Sections.
following in
and Divislon
accordance with
1 Specificatlon
Product data or manufacturer's specifications and
instal-lation instructions for fo.l-lowing products. Incfude
Iaboratory test reports and other data to show compliance
with specificatj-ons (including specified standards) .
1. Structural steel (each type), including certified
copies of mill reports covering chemical and physical
properties.
2. High-strength boLts (each type), includinq nuts and
washers.
Include Direct Tension Indicators if used.
3. Structural steel prj-mer paint.
Shop drawings prepared under supervision of a l-icensed
Structural Engineer, including complete detail-s and
schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steef
members, procedures, and diagrams.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05i.20 - 1
I
I
1 tnclude details of cuts, connecti-ons, camber, holes'
and other pertinent data. Indi-cate welds by standard
AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each
weId.
Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installation of anchor boLts and other anchorages Ito be installed as work of other sections. I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Comply wlth provisions
except as otherwise indi-cated:
r.4 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
3.
5.
A
A.
American Institute of Steel- Construction
of Standard Practice for Stee1 Buildings
of followj.ng,
(AISC) "Code
and Bridges. "
Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby
modified bv deletion of the followi.nq sentence:
1) "This approval constitutes the owner's
acceptance of all responsi-bility for the
design adequacy of any detail configuration of
connections developed by the fabricator as a
part of his preparation of these shop
drawinqs. "
AISC "Specifications for Structural Stee1 Bulldings, "
including "Commentary. "
"Specifications for Structural- Joints using
or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research
Structural- Connections.
Amer j.can Welding Society (AWS ) D1 . 1
Welding Code - Steel."
ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for DeLivery of Rolled
Steel P]ates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for
Structural Use. "
Qual-if ications f or !{elding Work: Qual-if y we}ding
procedures and welding oPerators in accordance with AWs
"QuaIj-fication" requirements.
l-. Provide certification that welders to be employed in
work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification
tests.
2. If recertificatj-on of weLders is required, retesting
will be Contractor's responsibility.
DEL]VERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure
uninterrupted progress of work.
Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices' which are to
be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry' in ample
time to not to delay work.
ASTM A 325
Council on
"Structural
1EI.J
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2
1.
r
G.
H.
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
YI{|(L Z -
Store materiafs to permit easy access for inspection and
identification. Keep steel members off ground by using
pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from erosj-on and
deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty,
clean and relubricate before use.
Do not store material-s on structure in a manner that
might cause distortion or damage to members or
supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged
materials or structures as directed.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work that
will be exposed to view, use only materials that are
smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting,
rust and scale seam marks, rolfer marks, rolled trade
names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding,
or by welding and grindj-ng, prior to cleaning, treating,
and applying surface finishes.
Structural- Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
D.
E.
Cold-Formed Steel- Tubinq:ASTM A 500, Grade B.
Steel Pipe:
501.
ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A
Steel Castings:
carbon steel.
ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, medium-strength
Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grade 1015
or 1020, cold-finished carbon steel with dimensj-ons
complying with AISC Specifications.
z.L
Anchor BoLts:
indlcated.
Unfinished Threaded Pasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A,
regular low-carbon steef bolts and nuts.
1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for aff connections.
High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon
structural bol-ts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened
washers, as fol-Lows :
Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel- boIts, nuts,
and washers, complying with ASTM A 325.
J.ELectrodes for Weldinq:
ASTM A 307, nonheaded type unJ-ess otherwise
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Comply with AWS Code.
05120 - 3
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
K.
L.
Structural Steel Pri-mer Paint:
l-ead-iron oxide, oil alkyd.
Structural Steel Primer Pai-nt:
JJ rL Paint 2; red
SSPC - Paint 13.
2.2 I Abr(l-ufrt l-vt\
Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assembfe
structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible.
Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with
AISC Specifications and as indicated on finaL shop
drawings. Provide camber j-n structural members where
indicated.
Properly mark and match-mark materials for field
assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will
expedite erection 'and minimize field handling of
materials.
Where finishing is required, complete assembly'
including welding of units, before start of finishing
operations. Provide finish surfaces of members
exposed in final structure free of markings' burrs'
and other defects.
B. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. I
C. BoIt field connections, except where welded connectj-ons or Iother connections are indicated. I
1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal Ibofted connections, excePt where unfinished bolts are tindlcated.
High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength
threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications
for Structura] Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Tighten boLts to 'snug-tight' condition.
Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures'
appearance and quatity of we1ds, and methods used in
correcting welding work.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended
by manufacturer of shear connectors. Vield shear
connectors in field, spaced as shown, to beams and girders
in composite construction. Use automati-c end welding of
headed stud shear connectors in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
Steel Wall Framing: Select members that are true and
straight for fabrication of steel wa]l- framing.
Straj.ghten as required to provide uniform' square' and
true members in completed wal1 franing'
I
t
I
I
T
t
t
I
D.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4
H.
a
A.
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Expansion Joi-nts: Provide expansion joints in steel shelf
angles when part of structura.l- steel frame; locate at
vertical- brick expansion joints as indicated on drawings.
SHOP PAINTING
General: Shop-paint structuraf steel ' except those
members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete
or mortar. Paint embedded steel- that i-s partially exposed
on exposed portj-ons and initial 2 inches of embedded areas
on1y.
1. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength
bolted with fri.ction-type connections.
Surface Preparation: After inspection and before
shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose
rust, loose mill scaLe, and spatter' slag, or fl-ux
deposits. Clean steeL in accordance with Steel Structures
Painting Council- (SSPC) .
Painting: Provide a one-coat, shop-applied paint system
complying wj-th Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
Paint System Guide No. 7.00.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
General: Material-s and fabrication procedures are subject
to inspection and tests in mi-11. shop, and field'
conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such
inspections and tests will not rel-ieve Contractor of
responsibility for providing materiafs and fabrication
procedures in compfiance with specified requirements.
1. Promptly remove and replace materiafs or fabricated
components that do not comply.
Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are
typical; simifar details apply to similar conditions'
unl-ess otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site
whenever possible without causing delay in the work.
1. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members
and connections for any portion of structure are not
clearly indicated.
3 - EXECUT]ON
ERECT]ON
Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring
and bracing members with connections of sufficient
PART
STRUCTURAL STEE],05120 - 5
strength to bear imposed 1oads. Remove temporary members
and cbnnections when permanent members are in place and
finaL connections are made. Provide temporary guy l-ines
to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection
proceeds,
Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and
"or'i.irrg platforms as necessary to effectively complete
work.
Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: CLean concrete and
*asonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and
roughen to improve bond to surfaces. clean bottom surface
of base and bearing Plates '
1. Set foose and attached base plates and bearing plates Ifor structural members on wedges or other adjusting t
devices.
2. Tighten anchor bol-ts after supported members have been
positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or
shims, but if protruding, cut off fl-ush with edge of
base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases
.1r nlates to ensure that no voids remain. Flnish
exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and
allow to cure.
4. For proprietary grout material-s, comply with
manufacturer t s instructions .
Field Assembly: set structuraL frames accurately to lines
and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various
members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. clean bearing surfaces and other
iurfaces that will be in permanent contact before
assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
Level and plumb individual members of stlucture within
specified AISC tolerances.
Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop
drawings.
Erection Bolts: On exposed wefded constructj-on' remove
erection bolts, fill- hotes with plug welds, and grind
smooth at exPosed surfaces.
1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing' adequacy
of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of
paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. bo not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or
by using drift pins, except in secondary bracing
members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to adnit
bolts.
t
I
I
I
t
R
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
D.
E.
F.
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
H.
A.
R
n
F.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
5.2
Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in fiefd for
correcting fabrication errors in primary structuraL
framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary
members that are not under stress, ds acceptable to
Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared
appearance when permitted.
Torrr:h-lln Paintinrr' Tmmediafelv after election, cfeanr vsvrr vt/
field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint. App1y paint to exposed areas using same materiaL
as used for shop painting.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils.
QUALITY CONTROL
Engage an independent testing and inspection agency to
inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded
connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports.
Testing agency shal-l- conduct and interpret tests, state in
each report whether test specimens comply with
requirements, and specifically state any deviatj-ons
therefrom.
Provide access for testing agency to places where
structural steel work is being fabricated or produced so
that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
Testing agency may inspect structural steel- at
before shipment.
plant
Correct defici-encies in structural steel work that
inspections and Iaboratory test reports have indicated to
be not in compliance wlth requirements. Perform
additional tests, at Contractor I s expense, as necessary to
reconfirm any noncompliance of orj-gi.nal work and to show
compliance of corrected work.
Field-Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC
specifications.
Fiel.d hlelding: Inspect and
structural steel as foll-ows:
test during erection of
1. Certify welders and conduct inspections
required. Record types and locations of
and tests as
defects found
performed toin work.Record work requj-red and
correct deficiencies.
2. Perform visual- inspection of all welds.
3. Perform specific tests of full penetration welds by
one of the foll-owing methods:
STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 7
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM e709; performed
on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or
zones of incomplete fusion or penetration not
acceptable.c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM 894
minimum quality level "2-2T".d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM 8164.
and 8J,42;
END OF SECTTON 051.20
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
ISTRUCTT'RAL STEEL 05120 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05220 - STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Divlsion 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section-
1..2 SUMMARY
This Section includes steel joists and joist girders for
roof framing. Types of joists requlred include the
f ol1owj,ng:
1. H-Series Open Web Steel Joists.
2. K-Serj-es Open Web Steel Joists.
B. Refer to Division 3 Sections for installation of anchors
set in concrete.
C. Refer to Division 4 Sections for installation of anchors
set in masonrv.
D. Refer to Division 5 Section "Meta.L Fabri-cati-ons" for
grout.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
Sections.
folJ-owing in accordance with
and Division 1 SPecification
B. Product data and installation instructions for each type
of ioist and accessories.
1. Include manufacturer's certification that joists
compJ.y with SJI "Specifications."
C. Shop drawings showing layout of joist members, special
connections, joining and accessories. Include mark,
number' type, location and spacing of joists and bridging'
cafculations bearing the engineer's stamp and signature
shalt accompany the shop drawj-ngs.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
General: Provide joists fabricated in compliance with
SteeL Joist lnstitute (SJI) "Standard Specifications' Load
Tables and Weight Tables for SteeI Joists and Joist
Girders, "
A.
STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS 05220 - |
B. Qualification of Field Welding: Qualify welding processes
and wel-ding operators in accordance with American Welding
Society (AWS) "Structural V{eLding Code - Steelr" AWS D1 .1.
C. Inspecti-on:Tnqr'!cct 'i oi sts in accordance with SJI4. rdyv v eItSnar-ifications."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handfe steel joists as recommended in
SJI "Specifications." Handle and store joists in a manner
to avoid deforming members and to avoid excessive
stresses.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.I MATERIALS
A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications" for chord and web
sections.
B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36.
C. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A'
regular hexagon type, low carbon steel .
D. Steel Prime Paint: Comply with SrlI "Specificati-ons."
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate steel- joists in accordance with SJI
"Specification. "
B. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging
for joists and joist girders, complying with SJI
"Specifications. "
C. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages, including steeL
bearing plates, to secure joists to adjacent construction,
complying wlth SJI "SpecJ-fications-"
D. Header Units: Provide header units to support tail joists
at openings in floor or roof system not framed with steel
shapes.
E. Shop Painting: Remove Loose scale, heavy rust' and other
foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories
before aPPlication of shoP Paint-
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
tSTEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS 05220 - 2
B.
n
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Apply one shop coat of steel prime paint to joists and
accessorles, by spraying, dipping, or other method to
provide a continuous dry paint fi-1m thickness of not
l-ess than 0.50 mi].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3. 1 ERECTION
A. Place and secure steel
"Specifi.cati.ons, " final-
specified.
joists in accordance with SJI
shop drawings, and as herein
Anchors: Furnish anchor bofts, steel bearlng plates, and
other devices to be built into concrete and masonry
construction.
1. Provide unfi-nished threaded fasteners for anchor
bolts, unless high strength bofts indicated.
Placing Joists: Do not start placement of steel joists
until supporting work is in place and secured. Place
joists on supporting work, adjust and align j-n accurate
locations and spacing before permanently fastening.
Provide temporary bridging, connections, and anchors to
ensure lateral stability during construction.
1. Where "open-web" joist lengths are 40 feet and longer'
install a center row of bolted bridging to provide
fateral stabj-lity before slackening of hoisting lines '
Bridging: Install bridging simultaneously with joist
erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor
ends of bridging lines at toP and bottom chords where
terminating at walLs or beams.
Fasteninq Joists:Comply with the following:
1. Field weLd joists to supporting steel framework and
steel bearing plates where lndicated in accordance
with SJI "Specifications" for type of joists used-
Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placing
of -i oists .
END OF SECTION 05220
STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS UJZZU - 5
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
PART 1
1.1
A
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK
1)
- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supptementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this section.
SUMMARY
This Section incl-udes
applications.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
Sectlons.
steel deck units for roof
1.3
A.
I
I
t
following in accordance wj-th
and Division 1 Specification
B.I
I
I
1. Product data including manufacturer's specifications
and installation instructions for each type of decking
and accessori-es.
a. Provide test data for mechani-cal fasteners used in
lieu of weldi-ng for fastening deck to supporting
structures.
2. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units,
, anchorage detal-ls, and conditions requiring closure
strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strj-ps,
cut openings, special jointing, and other accessories.
I.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the
following codes and standards, except as otherwise
indicated:
1. Ameri-can Iron and Steel Institute (AISI),
of Cold-Formed SteeI"Specification for the Design
Structural Members. "2. American Welding Society (AWS), D1 .3 "Structural
Welding Code - Sheet Steef. "3. Steef Deck Institute (SDI), "Desj-gn Manual for
Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks."
Qualification of Fi-e1d V{elding: Use qualified welding
processes and weLding operators in accordance with "Welder
Qualification" procedures of AWS.
STEEL DECK nq?1n - 1
PART
2.r
1.5
- PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Steel for Gal-vanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446, grade
as required to conply with SDI specifications.
Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36.
Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, commercial quality,
galvanized.
Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60.
Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are
damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with
procedures specified in ASTM A 780.
FABRICATION
General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more
supports, with f1ush, telescopedr or nested 2-inch laps at
ends and interlocking or nested sj-de laps, of metal
thickness, depth, and width as indicated.
Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply
with SDI "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof
Deck. tt
Metaf Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for
end-abutting floor deck units of not less than same
thickness as decking. Form to match contour of deck units
and approximately 6 inches wide.
I
I
I
t
A.Avail-able Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with
requj-rements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated in the work include but are not llmited to
the followinq:
1. Bowman Metal Deck Div., Cyclops Corp.
2. Consolidated Systems' Inc.
3. Epic Metals Corp.
4. Marlyn Steel- Products' Inc.
5. H. H. Robertson Co.
6. RolI Form Products' Inc.
'1 . Roof Deck, Inc.
8. United Steel Deck, Inc.
9. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corp.
10. Wheeli-ng Corrugating Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A
ar
t
T
t
t
I
I
I
A.
B.
c.
STEEL DECK 05310 - 2
D.
a
D.
F.
G.
H.
I
I
t
I
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART
3.1
A.
Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of
0.071-inch min. (14 gage) gal-vanized sheet steel- with
l-evef bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow
to drain. Provide sump pans of adequate size to
receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less
than 3 inches wide. Recess pans not less than I-I/2
inches bel-ow roof deck surface unless otherwise shown
or required by deck configuration. Hofes for drains
will be cut in the field bY others.
3 - EXECUTION
]NSTALLATION
General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations, shop drawi-ngs, and as
specified herein.
Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust
to finaf position with ends accurately aligned and bearing
on supporting members before being permanently fastened.
Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
Place deck units flat and square' secured to adjacent
framing without warp or deflectlon.
Coordinate and cooperate with structural- steel erector in
Iocating decking bundl-es to prevent overloading of
structural members .
Do not use deck units for storage or working platforms
until permanently secured.
Fastening Deck Units: Fasten as shown on the structural
drawings.
1. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual
shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work'
Cutti-ng and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and
accessories around other work projecting through or
adjacent to the decking' as shown.
Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal-
reinforcement and cLosure pieces as required for strength'
continuity of decking, and support of other work shown.
l-. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment
devi-ces.
STEEL DECK 05310 - 3
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
t
I
T
I
t
T Roof Sunp Pans: Place over openings
decking and weld to top decking surface.
more than 1.2 inches o.c. with at least
provided in roof
Space welds not
one weld at each
END OF SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK 05310 - {
I
I
I
sEcrroN 05400 -COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART
1.1
A.
PART
z.L
I. - bI,IIL.I(.flL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
I t'2
1-J
L.4
Drawj-ngs and general provisions of Contract' incJ-uding
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this section.
SUMMARY
A.Types of col-d-formed metal framing units
following:
C-shaped steel studs.
following in
and Division
include the
accordance with
1 Specification
1.
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
Sections.
Product data and install-ation instructions for each
item of cold-formed metal framing and accessories.
Shop drawings for special components and instal-lations
not ful1y dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's
product data.
a. IncLude placing drawings for framing members
showing size and gage desj-gnations' number, type,
location, and spacing. Indicate supplemental
strapping, bracing, splices, bridging'
accessories, and details required for proper
insta l- l-at i-on.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with American
Wetding Society (AWS) D1 .3, I'Structural Welding Code
Sheet SteeI. "
B. Pre-lnstallation Conference:Prior to start of
installation of metal framing systems, meet at project
si-te with installers of other work including door and
window frames and mechanical- and electrical work. Review
areas of potential interference and conflicts, and
coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing
work.
2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
COLD-FORMED METAI FRAMING 05400 - 1
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated ln the work include but are not limited to
the following:
1. Afabama Metal Industries CorP.
2. Bostwick STeel Framing Co.
3. DaIe Industries, Inc.
4. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
5. Marino Industries, fnc.
6. Superior Steel Studs, Inc.
'7 . USG Industri-es
8. United States Steel
METAL FRAMING
System Components: Manufacturers' standard load-bearing
steef studs and joists of type I sizet shape, and gage as
indicated. With each type of metaf framing required'
provide manufacturer's standard, steel- runners (tracks)'
blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements'
fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated' as
needed to provlde a complete metal framing system.
Materials and Finishes:
For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing
components of structural quality steel sheet with a
minj-mum yield point of 50'000 psi, ASTM A 570.
For 18-gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing
components of commercial quality steel sheet with a
minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 611-.
Provide prime-coated finish with one coat of
shop-applied red-oxide, zinc-chromate, or other
si-milar rust-inhibitive primer.
Fasteners: Provide nuts, bo1ts, washers. screws, and
other fasteners with corrosion-resistant plated
finish.
Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as
recommended by stud manufacturer.
FABRICATION
Generaf: Framing components may be prefabricated into
assemblies before erection. Fabricate panels plumb'
square, true to line, and braced against racking with
joints wel-ded. Perform j.ifting of prefabrj-cated units to
prevent damage or dlstortion.
Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach
dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw
fasteners, as standard with manufacturer.
2.2
2.5
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
t
I
1.
q
A.
A.
A.
B.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2
D.
B.
D.
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.
Fabrication Toferances: Fabricate units to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true
to line of 1,/8 inch in 10 feet.
3 - EXECUTIONPART
J-1
A
INSTALLATION
General-: Install metal
manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
framing systems in accordance with
or written lnstructions and
Runner Tracks: InstaLl continuous tracks sized to match
studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops
of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud
manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do
not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for naiL or power-driven
fasteners or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment.
Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
Instaflation of Wall- Studs: Secure studs to top and
bottom runner tracks by ej-ther welding or screw fastening
at both inside and outside flanges. Unless shown
otherwi-se, all exterior studs shalf be minimum 18 GA at
T 6rr n r-
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracinq or
required for nonplumb wal1s or warped surfaces and similar
requirements.
Where stud system abuts structuraf columns or waI1s,
including masonry wal-l-s, anchor ends of stiffeners to
supporting structure.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing 1n
metal framing system wherever wall-s or partltions are
lndicated to support fixtures, equipment, services,
casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work
requiring attachment to the wa11 or partition. Where type
of supplementary support j-s not otherwise indicated,
comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and
industry standards in each case, considering weight or
loading resulting from item supported.
Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double
stud at each jamb of frame except where more than two are
either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions.
Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below walI
openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or
by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs
of wall. Secure stud system wal-l opening frame i-n manner
indicated.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3
Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with
separate studs; do not bridge the jolnt with components of
stud system.
Install horizontal- stiffeners in stud system' spaced(vertical distance) at not more than 54 inches o.c. Weld
at each intersectlon.
Reinforce ends with end cIips, steel hangers, steel angle
clips, steel stud section, or as otherwise recommended byjoist manufacturer.
Fiel-d Painting: Touch-up damaged shop-applied protective
coatings. Use compatible primer for prime-coated surfacesi
use galvanizing repair system for galvanized surfaces.
END OF SECTION O54OO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
K.
COLD-FORMED METAI FRAM]NG 05400 - 4
I SECTION O55OO - METAL FABRICATIONS
I PARTl-GENERAL
I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, lncluding
I General and Supplementary Condi-tions and Division 1
I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I L.2 SUMMARY
I A. This Section includes the following metal fabrications:
1. Rough hardware.
2. Ladders.
3. Loose bearing and leveling plates-
4. Loose steel lintels.
5. Miscellaneous framing and supports for exterior glass
canopy.
6. Miscellaneous steel trim.
7. Pipe bolLards.
8. Hand,/guardraiLs.
9. Bicycle rack.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contaj-n
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "structural Steel" for structural
steel framing system components.
]-.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this ArticLe according to
the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for bicycte racks, paint products, and grout.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each
metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and detaiLs of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide
templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation
under other Sections.
t D. Samples representative of material-s and finished products
as may be requested bY Architect.
I E. WeLder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that
I welders comply with requirements specified under the
"Quality Assurance" Article.
I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I METAL FABRrcATroNs 05500 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
A.
R
A.
Fabricator Quali-fications: Firm experienced in producinq
metaf fabrications similar to those indicated for this
Project with a record of successfuf in-service
periormance, and with sufficient producti-on capacity to
produce required units without delayinq the Work.
Weldi-ng Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of
AWS D1.1 "structural Welding Code--Steel, " AWS D1'.2
"structural Welding Code--Al-uminum, " and AWS D1 .3
"structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS
quafifi-cation tests for welding processes i-nvoLved
ind, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Check actuaf locations of walls and
other construction to which metaf fabrications must fit by
accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed
wlth fabricating products without field measurements'
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. AlLow
€ar +r.irnrn.i n,-r .hA f .i++inrrru! L! IrtullrlrY clllll l-!LurrrY.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.I FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, Genera]: For metal fabrications exposed
to view in the completed vflork, provide materials selected
for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from
surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed
nirtinrr- seam marks, roLler marks, rolled trade names, or
lJf u errrY, '
roughness
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M'
C. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A'786/A 786M'
D. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as
f oll-ows:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
METAI FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2
a.
E.
F.
A.
A.
?
A.
B.
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
For exterj-or installations and where indicated,
provide tublng with hot-dip galvanized coatlng per
ASTM A 53.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedul-e 40)'
unless otherwise indicated, or another weight reguired by
structuraf loads.
1.GaLvanized finish for exterior install-ations and where
indicated.
2.2
2.3
2.1
Welding Rods and Bare
specifications for the
ALUMINUM
Afuminum Extrusions:
60 63-T6.
PAINT
Electrodes: Select according to AWS
metal alloy to be welded.
ASTM B 22L (ASTM B 22IYl), alloY
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, fead- and
chromate-free, unj-versal modified-a1kyd primer complying
with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664. selected for
good resistance to normal atmospheric corrorosion,
compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and
capability to provide a sound foundation for field-app1led
topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: Hj-gh-zinc-dust-content paint
for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel-' with dry film
containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight,
and complyi-ng with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying
with SSPC-Paint L2, except containing no asbestos fibers.
FASTENERS
General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM
B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating'
for exterior use or where built into exterior waIIs.
Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307,
Grade A (ASTM F 558, Property Class 4.6), wi-th hex nuts'
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) , and, where indicated' flat
washers.
Machine Screws: ANSI 818.6.3.
Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2. l- (ANSI B18 .2. 3.8M)
E. Wood Screws: FIat head, carbon steel' ANSI B18.6.1.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
I
F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI 818.22.L (ANSI
BL8.22rI) I
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steelr ANSI
B16 . ZL. I.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of
materiaf indicated below with capability to sustain'
without faiLure, a load egual to 6 times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the
Ioad imposed when instal-led in concrete as determined by
testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
1. Materiaf: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class te/Zn 5.
2. Materiaf: Group 1 alloy 304 or 315 stainless-steel
bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M)
and ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 835M) .
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and
style as required.
GROUT
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged,
nonstaj"ning, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complyj-ng with
ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically reconmended by
manufacturer for interj-or and exterior applications.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not Ij-mited to, the following:
1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. B-5 Construction Grout; W. R. Bonsal- Co.
b. Diamond-Crete Grout; Concrete Service Materials
c. Supreme; Cormix Construction Chemicals.
d. Sure-grip High Performance Grout; Dayton Superior
a,.r rrr
e. puct n-s Groutt Euclid Chemical- Co-
f. Five Star Grout; Five Star Products.
S. Vibropruf #11; Lambert CorP.
h. Crystex; L e M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Masterffow 928 and 1L3; Master Builders
technologies' fnc.
Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
Sonogrout 14, Sonneborn Building
Products--ChemRex' Inc.
I. Kemsett The Spray-Cure Company.
CONCRETE FILL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
2.5
z.o
A.
B.
j.
k.
METAT FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4
A.
B.
(^
D.
H.
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
Concrete Materiats and Properties: Comply with
requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix
concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi (20 MPa), unless higher strengths are indicated.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
Form metaL fabrications from material-s of size, thickness,
and shapes indicated but not Iess than that needed to
comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to
dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawingrs, usi-ng
proven details of fabri.cation and support. Use type of
materials indicated or specifj-ed for various components of
each metal fabrication.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate
angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members j-n jigs
to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive
configuration required; maintain profile of member
throughout entire bend without buckling' twi-sting.
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of
components.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambj-ent temperature in the
design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal
assemblj-es to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and
overstressinq of weLds and fasteners.Base design
calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range) : 180 deg F (100 deg C) .
E. Shear and punch metafs cleanly and accurately. Remove
burrs.
F. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approxi-mately 1/32 inch
(1 nun) , unless otherwise indicated.Form bent-metal
corners to smal-lest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and
develop strength and corrosion resistance of base
metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overfap.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5
3. Remove welding fl-ux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, fi-nj-sh exposed welds and
surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows
after finishing, and contour of weLded surface matches
those adjacent.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints' flush and
smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use
exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated'
PhiIlips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate
joints where least conspicuous.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with
supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and
to support indicated loads.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest
extent possible to minj-mize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and
handling limitations.Use connections that maintain
structural- value of joined pieces. Clearly rnark unj-ts for
reassembly and coordinated instaLLation.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as
indicated to receive fi-nish hardware, screws, and simiLar
items.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a
manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water
may accumuLate.
ROUGH HARDWARE
Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bo1ts,
plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscel]aneous
steef and iron shapes as required for framing and
supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing
woodwork to concrete or other structures. Stralght bolts
and other stock rough hardware items are specified in
Division 6 Sections.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.
Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts that
bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel
washers elsewhere.
STEEL LADDERS
General: Fabricate ladders for the focations shown, with
dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as
indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3.
z.d
2.9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
K.
L.
M
B.
A.
METAI FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6
B.
(.
D.
F.
B.
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
Slderalls: Continuous, stee1, l/2-by-2-I/2-inch
(12-by-64-mm) fJ-at bars, with eased edges, spaced 18
j-nches ( 4 60 mm) apart .
Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel- bars, spaced
12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads
indicated and to hol-d centerl-ine of ladder rungs clear
of the wall surface bv not less than 7 inches (180
INM J .
Fit rungs in centerLine of side rail-s,
smooth on outer rail faces.
Support each ladder at top and bottom
points spaced not more than 5 feet
welded or boLted steel brackets.
plug weld and grind
and at intermedi-ate
(1.5 m) o.c. with
on top of each rung' either bY
aluminum-oxj-de granules set in
by using a tyPe of manufactured
aluminum-oxide grout.
framing and supports for
are not a part of structural
to complete the Work.
Provide nonslip surfacescoating the rung with
epoxy-resin adhesive, or
rung that is filled with
2.r0
A.
2.tt
A.
D.
2.t2
A.General: Provide steel
applications indicated that
steel framework as required
METAL FABRICATIONS
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
Provide loose bearing and level-ing plates for steel items
bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat,
free from warps or twists, and of the required thj-ckness
and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts
and for grouting as requi-red.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
Fabricate foose structural steel lintels from steel angles
and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in
masonry wal-1s and partitj-ons at locations indicated.
Weld adjoining members together to form a sj-ngle unit
where indicated.
Size l-oose lintel-s for equal bearing of 1 inch per foot
(85 mm per meter) of cl-ear span but not less than 8 inches
(200 mm) bearing at each side of openings, unless
otherwi-se indicated.
GaLvanize l-oose steel lintels focated in exterior waIIs.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
05500 - 7
Fabricate units to sizes, shapes' and profiles indicated
and required to receive other adjacent construction
retained by framing and suPports.Fabricate from
structural- steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded
constructi-on using mitered joints for field connectj-on-
Cut, dri-II, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers,
and simiLar items.
Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting
into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish
inserts if units must be installed after concrete is
placed.
a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24
inches (600 rnm) o.c. and provide minimum anchor
units in the form of steel- straps L-l/A inches (32
mm) wide by 1/4 inch (5 mm) thlck by 8 inches (200
mm) long.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from
structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed
edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices
wherever possible.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as reguired to
coordinate assembly and installation with other work-
Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete
or masonry constructj-on, spaced not more than 6 inches
(150 mm) from each end, 6 inches (150 run) from corners,
and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.' unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in exterior locations.
PIPE BOLLARDS
Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe.
Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel piPe
with 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick steel plate welded to
bottom of sleeve.
RAILINGS
Fabricate from ASTM A53, Schedule 40, hot-dipped
galvanized steel Pipe, !-I/2" nominal diameter
configuration to meet local- building codes and as
indicated on drawings.
FINISHES, GENERAL
2.13
A.
A.
A
2.L6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
tMETAI FABRICATIONS 05s00 - 8
1
A.
R
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Comply wi-th NAAMM "Metal-
recommendations relative to
finishes.
Finishes Manual" for
apptying and design j-ng
2.r7
2.'l-8
A.
PART
J.I
Finish metaL fabrications after assembly.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Gal-vanizj-ng: For those items indicated for galvanizing'
apply zinc coati-ng by the hot-dip process complying with
the following requirements:
1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A !23 for galvanizing both fabricated and
unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated
rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and
strj-p 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) thick or thicker.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous
metaL surfaces to comply with mini-mum requirements
indicated below for SSPC surface preparation
specifications and environmental exposure conditions of
instal-led metal fabrications:
Exteriors (SSPC Zone l-B): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Bfast
Cleaning. "Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A) : SSPC-SP 3 "Power TooI
Cleaning, "
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metaL
fabrications, except those wlth galvanized finishes or to
be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing' or
masonry, unless otherwise indicated.Comply with
requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification
No. 1" for shop painting.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system
established by the Al-uminum Association for designating
aluminum finishes.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical
Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish:
etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Archltectural Class
I clear coating 0.7 mil [0.018 mmJ or thicker) complying
with AAI4A 607 . 1.
3 - EXECUIION
PREPARATION
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 9
5.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
A.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings,
diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installing anchorages' including concrete inserts,
sl-eeves, anchor bolts, and miscell-aneous items having
integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items
t.^ D'',,\i 6/-f cil-a
Set s.Ieeves in concrete with tops flush with finish
surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and
/rn ?t,.r 16l_ 6 Anr f tt
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage
devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
miscel-laneous metal fabrications to in-place construction.
Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry
inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws, and other connectors as required.
B.Cutting, Fitting' and Placement:
dri11ing,and fitting required
miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication
accuratefy in location, alignment, and elevation; with Iedges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of racki t
and measured from estabfished fines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items
that are to be built j.nto concrete masonry or similar
constructl0n.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form
hairline ;oints. Weld connections that are not to be left
as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of
shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade
the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted
or screwed field connectlons.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and
develop strength and corrosi-on resistance of base
metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections' finish exposed welds and
surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows
after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches
those adjacent.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum
that wil-L come into contact with grout, concrete' masonry'
Perrormr":i:iil3; I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
D.
E.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 10
1.
A.
B.
A.
B.
A
B.
a
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
I
3.3
3.4
3.5
wood, or dissimilar metal-s with a heavy coat of bituminous
paant.
SETTING LOOSE PLATES
Cl-ean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of
bond-reduci-ng material-s, and roughen to improve bond to
surfaces. Cfean bottom surface of bearing pl-ates '
Set loose J-eveling and bearing pl-ates on wedges or other
adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been
positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not
remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush
with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates
to ensure that no voids remain.
INSTALLING PIPE BOILARDS
Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and
anchored i-nto concrete. After bollards have been inserted
into sleeves, fiLl annular space between bolLard and
sleeve solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed
and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions'
FiLl bol-lards sol-id1y with concrete' mounding top surface.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field
welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements
for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Appfy by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-mil- (0.05-mm)
minimum dry film thickness.
Touchup Painting: CLeaning and touchup painting of field
wel-ds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop
paint on miscelLaneous metal is specified in Division 9
Section "Painting. "
For galvanized surfaces, cfean weLds, bol-ted connections'
and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint to
comply with ASTM A 780.
METAI. FABRICATIONS
END OF SECTION O55OO
05500 - 1.1-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
I PARTl-GENERAL
I
1.1- RELATED DOCUMENTS
I A. Drawi_ngs and general provisions of Contract, includlng
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
I Specification Sectj.ons, apply to this Section.
I L.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
L. Framing with dimension l-umber.
2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
3. Wood grounds, nai-lers, and blocking.
4. Sheathinq.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork"
for interior woodwork speci-aIly fabricated for this
Proj ect.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as
part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless
otherwise specified.
r PART2-PRODUCTS
r z.! LUMBER, GENERAL
I A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to complyr with PS 20 "Ameri-can Softwood Lumber Standard" and with
applicable gradi-ng rufes of inspection agencies certified
I by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board ofr Review.
I 1. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum
I moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for
sizes 2 inches or l-ess in nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
I
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick' 2 Eo 4 lnches
wide) provide the foLLowing grade and species:
1. "Construction" grade.
t
T
I
RoUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
General-: Provide Lumber for support or attachment of
other construction j-ncluding rooftop equipment curbs and
support bases, cant strips, bucks, nail-ers. blockj-ng,
furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members.
2.4
Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any
species or board-size l-umber as required, "No. 3 Common"
or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No.
2 Boards" per SPIB rules.
CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL
Construction Panel- Standards: Comply with PS L "U.S.
Product Standard for Construction and Industrial PJ.ywood"
for plywood construction panels and, for products not
manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA PRP-108.
Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each
factory-marked wj-th APA trademark evidencing compliance
with grade requirements.
CONCEALED PERFORMANCE-RATED CONSTRUCTION PANELS
General: Where construction panels are indicated for the
following concealed types of applications, provide APA
Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements
designated under each application for grade designation,
span rating, exposure durability classificatlon, edge
detail (where appLi-cable), and thickness.
B.Wall Sheathinq:APA RATED SHEATHING.
Exposure Durability Classification: EXPOSURE L.
2.6 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING
A. Plvwood Backinq Panefs:For mounting electrical or
telephone equipment, provide fi-re-retardant-treated
plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED
EXPOSURE I, in thickness indicated, Qtr if not otherwise
indicated, not less than 15/32 inch.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated
that comply with requirements specified in this article
for material and manufacture.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative hunidity, provide
fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153
or of AISI Type 304 stainless steef.
r\ -,z. I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
A.
B.
A.
A.
A.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 05100 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
c. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report
NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel botts complying wi-th ASTM A 307' Grade A;
with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indi-cated, flat
washers.
G. Screw Nails for Cedar Lumber: Stainless steel finish'
2.8 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. GeneraL:Where lumber or plywood is indicated as
preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to be
treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA
Standards c2 (Lumber) and c9 (Plywood) . Mark each treated
item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements'
B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne
preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf' For
interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and
r. lrrt.rnnA r.., a maximUm moisture Content, reSpeCtively, of 19PlLJw\.,\-,\ruvpercent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the
following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs' equipment suPPort bases,
blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood si11s, sleepers, blocking, furrlng, stripping,
and sirniLar concealed members in contact with masonry
or concrete.
2.9 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated,
pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant
themicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C2'7, respectively'
for treatment type indicated; identify "fire-retardant-
treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. , U. S. Testing, Timber
Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction'
B. Exterior TYPe:
indi.cated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Use for exterior locations and where
06100 - 3
3.1
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
A.
D.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality
of rough carpentry construction and that are too smalf to
use in fabricating rough carpentry wilh minimum joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
Set rough carpentry to required leveLs and lines' with
members plurnb and true to line and cut and fitted.
Fit rough carpentry to other constructioni scribe and cope
as required for accurate fit. Correlate l-ocation of
furri-ng, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar suPports
to allow attachment of other construction.
Securely attach rough
anchoring and fastening
Countersink nail heads
holes.
carpentry work to substrate bY
as indicated.
on exposed carpentry work and fil-I
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use
finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size
that will not penetrate members where opposite side wilf
be exposed to view or wiLl receive finish materiafs. Make
tight connections between rnembers. Install fasteners
without sptitting of wood; predrill as required.
END OF SECTION O5]-OO
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4
I sEcrroN 06402 - INTERT.R ARcHrrEcruRAL wooDWoRK
t_.1
r.z
following in
and Division
A.
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section' MiIlwork
drawings and specifications; and j-nterior's drawings and
specifications, both issued separately.
SUMMARY
This Section inctudes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim and rails.
2. Wood cabinets (casework) .
3. Laminate clad cabinets (plastic-covered casework) '
4. Cabinet tops (countertoPs).
5. Interior miscell-aneous ornamental items.
6. Interior door frames (jambs)'
B. Related Sections:The following sections contain
requirements that relate to this section:
L. Divj-sion 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring,
blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed
to v1ew.
2. Division 8 Section "F1ush Wood Doors" for doors
specified by reference to architectural woodwork
standards.
3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for final finlshing of
install-ed architectural woodwork.
1.3 CIIRMTTTAT.S
General: Submit the
Condi-tions of Contract
Sections.
Product data for each tyPe of product and process
specified in this section and incorporated into items of
aichitectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and
instal-l-ation.
shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned
plans and elevations, Iarge-scaIe details, attachment
devi-ces, and other comPonents.
accordance with
1 Specificatlon
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - L
Samples for initial selection purposes of the following in
form of manufacturer's color charts consi-sting of actual-
units or sections of units showing fuII range of colors,
textures, and patterns availab.l-e f^- oanlr rrrna ^r material
indicated.
1. Plasti-c laminate.
2. Factory-applied opaque finishes
E.Samples for verification Durposes of the followinq:
Lumber with or for transparent finish for each species
and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
Wood veneer faced panel products;, with or for
transparent finish, for each species with separate
samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
Lumber and panel products with factory-applied opaguefinish for each finish system and color.
Laminate clad panel products for each type, co1or,pattern, and surface finish, with separate samples of
unfaced panel product used for core.
Corner pieces as follows:
4,.Mi-ter ioints for standi-nq trim.
Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and
finish.
F. Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturercertifying that products comply with specified
requirements.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons speci-fied in
"Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include list of completed
projects with project names, addresses, names of
Architects and Owners, and other informatj-on specified.
L.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualificatj-ons:Firm experienced in
successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project, with sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without
causing delay in the Work.
Single-Source Responsibility: Arrange for production by a
single firm of architectural woodwork with sequence
matched wood veneers.
Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of
architectural woodwork by a firm that can demonstrate
successful experience in installing architectural woodwork
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
3.
6.
D,
B.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2
D.
A.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART
2.t
A.
z.z
items simiLar in type and quality to those required for
thi c nrnicr-l-
AWI Quality Standard: Comply wlth applicabfe requirements
of "Archi-tectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by
the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) except as
otherwise indi-cated.
MilLwork drawings and specificati-ons and Interior's
drawings and specifications take precedence over this
specification where differences occur.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and
handling to prevent damage, soifage, and deterioration.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be
fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of
other construction by accurate field measurements before
rnanufacturJ-ng woodworki show recorded measurements on
final- shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule
with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
2 - PRODUCTS
HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering high pressure
decorative laminates which may be incorporated in the work
incLude but are not limited to the following:
1. Formica Corp.
2. Laminart.
3. Micarta Div., Westinghouse Electric Corp.
4. Nevamar Corp.
5. Ralph Wil-son Plastics Co.
6. Sterling Engineered Products, Inc'
MATER]ALS
General: Provide materials that comply with requi-rements
of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork
and quality grade indicated and, where the following
products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the
referenced product standards, that apply to product
characteristics indicated :
1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4
2. Hiqh Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3
z.J
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
A.
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
B.
A
B.
('
3. Medj-um Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1
5. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
6. Formaldehyde Emission Levefs: Comply with
formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary
standard referenced below:
a. Particfeboard: NPA 8.
b. Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9.
c. Hardwood PLvwood: HPMA FE.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and
hardware application, before shj.pment to project site to
maximum extent possible. DisassembLe components only as
necessary for shipment and installation. Vilhere necessary
for fitting at site, provide ampJ-e afLowance for scribing'
trimming, and fitting.
Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possibfe, to
receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fi-xtures,
el-ectri-cal work, and similar items. l,ocate openings
accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openlngs. Smooth
edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and
similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a
water-resistant coating.
2.4
Quality Standard:
Grade: Premium.
Lumber Species:
Comply with AWI
As indicated on Interior Drawings.
Lumber Species: Match species and cut indicated for other
types of transparent finished architectural woodwork
located in same area of building unless otherwi-se
indicated.
z-a STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAILS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
Quality Standard: Cornply with AWI Section 300.
Grade: Premium.
Lumber Species: Any closed-grain hardwood listed in
referenced woodworking standard.
2.5 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM AND RAIIS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
section 300. I
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
T
2.8
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its
Di-vision 400A "Wood Cabinets."
Grade: Premium.
LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS (PTASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK)
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its
Division 400B "Laminate Clad Cabinets."
Grade: Premium.
Laminate Cladding: High Pressure decorative lamj-nate
complying with the following requirements:
1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materiaLs and
products that result i-n colors and textures of exposed
laminate surfaces complying with the following
requirements:
a. Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by
reference to l-aminate manufacturer's standard
designatj.ons for these characteristics.
l,) Solid colors.
2) Patterns.
2. l,aminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces: Provide laminate
cladding complying with the following requirements for
type of surface and qrade.
a. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42 (0.042-inch nominal
thickness).
b. Edges: GP-50 (0.050-inch nominal- thi-ckness) '
ARCHITECTURAL CAB]NET TOPS (COUNTERTOPS)
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its
Division 400C.
Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying
with the following:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: Hi-gh
pressure decorative laminate as follows:
a. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials
and products that result in colors and textures of
exposed laminate surfaces complying with the
following requirements :
B.
A.
B.
A.
B.
I
I
I
t
I INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5
B.
2.10
A.
B.
a
D.
1) Match color, pattern, and finish indicated by
reference to manufacturer t s standard
designations for these characteristics.
b. Grade: Pt-42 (0.042-inch nominal thickness).
3. Edge Treatment: Same as
horizontal" surfaces.
Iaminate cl-addinq on
2.9 FLUSH WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT F]NISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 and 1ts
Divi-sion 500A.
Grade: Premium.
Veneer Species: As indicated on Interior Drawings.
INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900B.
Grade: Premium.
Lumber Species: As indicated on Interior Drawings.
Lumber Species: Match species and cut indicated for other
types of transparent finished architectural woodwork
located in same areas of buiJ-ding unless otherwise
indicated.
2.T1 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Screws: Select material, tYPe'size, and finish required
FF-S-l-l-1 f or applicablefor each use.
requj-rements.
1. For metal
recommended
B, Nails: Select
for each use.
requirements.
Comply with FS
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required
by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provj-de
nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts
on inside face of exterior wa]Ls and elsewhere as required
for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead
expansion boLt devices for dril-Ied-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors' as required, to be set into
concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork
anchorage,
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
framing supports, provide screws as
by metal framing manufacturer.
material, type, size, and finish required
Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6
D.
E.
!1..
B.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
PART
J.Z
3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Quality Standard: Instafl- woodwork to comply with AWI
Section L70O for same grade specified in Part 2 of this
section for type of woodwork involved-
InstaII woodwork plumb, level, truef and strai-ght wlth no
distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims-
InstalL to a tolerance of L/8 inch in 8r-0rr for plumb and
fevet (incl-uding tops) and with no variations in flushness
of adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish
cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or
directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds'
stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed
fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete
installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener
heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed
nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish where transparent finish is
indicated.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and
drawers fit openings Properly and are accurately aligned.
Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings
and to provide unencumbered operation.complete the
installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of cabinets
with transparent finish.
Tops: Anchor secureLy to base units and other support
systems as indicated.
ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to
eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not
possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch
up factory-applied finishes to restore damaqed or soil-ed
areas.
PROTECTION
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK uo{uz - t
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a
manner acceptable to manufacturer and InstaIIer, thatensures that woodwork is being without damage or
deterioration at tine of Substantial Conpletion.
END OF SECTION 06402
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
IINTERIOR ARCHIIECTUNAL WOODWORK 06{02 - I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
nnhm Iritr,t l- - L'LL\.rJftft!
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract' including
Generaf and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section incl-udes the followinq:
1. Cold-applied asphalt cut-back dampproofing.
1,3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with
Conditions of Contract and Divi-sion 1 Section
"Submittals. "
1. Product Data: Include data substantiating that
materiafs comply with specifi-ed requirements for each
dampproofing material specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. InstaLl-er Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer
who has completed bj-tuminous dampproofing work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project
and that has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary darnpproofing
materj"als and primers from a single manufacturer. Provide
secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing work only after
substrate construction and penetrating work have been
completed.
B. Weather: Proceed with dampproofing
existing and forecast weather conditions
to be performed in accordance with
recorunendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.I BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING, GENERAL
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
work only when
will permit work
manufacturer's
07150 - 1
z-z
z-3
A.
PART 3
J.I
A.
COLD-APPLIED ASPHALT CUT-BACK DAMPPROOFING
Asphalt Compound: Asphalt and solvent compound,
compounded to penetrate substrate and build to firm'
moisture-resj-stant' vapor-resistant, elastic coating.
1. Spray Grade: Emulsified asphalt, prepared with
mineraf-col"l-oid emulsifying agents without fibrous
reinforcement' complying with ASTM D 1221 , Type III.
Avaifable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering asphalt cut-back
products that may be incorporated i-n the work include, but
are not l-imlted to, the following:
1. Celotex Corporation.
2. ChemRex Inc./Sonneborne Building Products Div.
3. J & P Petroleum Products, Inc.
4. Karnak Chemical CorPoration.
5. Koch Materials ComPanY.
6. Schuller International, Inc. (formerly Manville
Building Materials Corporation) .
'7 . Tamko Corporation.
8. Tremco, Inc.
Bond-Coat Type: Where asphalt dampproofing is indicated
on bond coat for bonding of plaster or other materials to
substrate, provide tack-surfaced material recommended by
manufacturer for application shown.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Glass-Fiber Mat: Nonwoven fiberglass fabric of continuous
filament or jack-straw filament,/yarn pattern of glass
fiber, impregnated and bound together with type of
organic/synthetic binder that is compatible with type of
biiuminous compound indicated to be reinforced, weighing
1.0 to 1.5 lbs. per 100 sq. ft., 36-inch-wide rolls-
Bituminous Grout: Comply with ASTM D 147.
Plastic Cement: Asphalt based, complying with ASTM D 49)'l
except provide coal tar base where specifically
recommended by manufacturer of bituminous dampproofing
materials.
- EXECUTION
PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental
to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials
manufacturer.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
B.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 0-7160 - 2
a
D.
E.
A.
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Install cant strips and similar accessori-es as shown and
as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though
not shown.
Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers (i-f any)
as recommended by prime materj-aIs manufacturer, with
particular attention at construction joints.
Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping
as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, where
indicated to precede application of dampproofing. Comply
with detai-1s shown and manufacturer's recommendations.
Give particular attention to requirements at building
expansion joints, j-f any.
Prime substrate as
manufacturer.
recommended by prime materials
Protection of Other hlork: Do not allow liquid and mastic
compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors.
Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of
work, by masking or otherwise protectinS adjoining work.
INSTALLATION. GENERAL
CompJ-y with manufacturer's recommendatj-ons, except where
more stringent requirements are indicated or specified and
where project conditions require extra precautions or
provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of work.
B]TUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING INSTAI,LATION
General: Apply dampproofing to all exterior below-grade
surfaces of exterior underground walls in contact with
earth or other backfill and where space is enclosed on
opposite side.
Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise
shown as "Reinforced, " instatl lapped course of
glass-fiber mat in first coat of dampproofing compound
before it thickens.
Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2-inch by 2-inch cant
strip of bitumlnous grout at base of vertical dampproofing
where it meets horizontaL surface.
Extend verti-cal dampproofing down wafls from finished
grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing,
and turn down minimum of 5 inches over outside face of
footing. Extend L2 inches onto intersecting walLs and
footlngs but do not extend onto surfaces that will be
exposed to view when project is completed.
COLD BITUMEN ON EXTERIOR SURFACES
3.2
J.J
3.4
BI TUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07r_60 - 3
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
A.Apply coat of co1d,
material, by brushing or
gallons per 100 sq. ft.,
as required to produce a
Less than 12 mils.
l-iquid bituminous dampproofing
spraying at rate of 1.25 to 2.0
depending upon substrate texture,
uniform dry film thickness of not
B. Apply a second coat same as specified above, after
alJ-owing 24 hours for drying of fi-rst coat. Apply secondcoat at rate of 0.8 to I.25 gallons per 100 sq. ft.
Double thickness of second coat where first application
has fail-ed to produce smooth, lustrous, impervious coat.
END OF SECTION 07160
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07150 - 4
A.
B.
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sEcrroN 012t0 -BUILDING INSULATION
PART
1.1
A.
L.Z
1.3
-L - bLl\ trt1A!
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Foundation wall insulation (supporting
2. Concealed buildj-ng insufation in board
3. Buildlng insul-ation in batt form.
Single PIy Membrane Roofing Insulation
Division 7, Section 07530.
DEFINITIONS
Drawings and
General- and
Speci fication
SUMMARY
This Section
General: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
Sections.
general provisions of Contract, including
Supplementary Conditi-ons and Division 1
Sections, apply to this Section.
includes the following:
following in
and Division
backfi-11-).
f orm.
is specified in
accordance with
1 Specification
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of
insulation products are designated by "r-values," they
represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity
(k-val-ues). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow
through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.
Thermal resistj-vi-ties are expressed by the temperature
difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces
required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot
per hour at mean temperatures indicated.
I.4 SUBM]TTALS
Product data
speci fied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristlcs:
for each type of insulation product
markings of
r'rrr'rrniz-afinn
BUILDING INSUI,ATION
Provide insul-ation
materials identical- to those whose indicated fire
performance characteristics have been determj-ned per the
ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing
and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate
applicable testing and inspecting
07210 - r-
t.6
PART
z. )-
A.
T
I
t
I
T
t
T
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
T
I
t
B.
B.
1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119'
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 135.
Single-Source Responsibllity for Insulation Products:
Obtain each type of building insul-ation from a single
source with resources to provide products of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties without
delaying progress of the Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from
deterj-oration by moisture, soiling, and other sources'
Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and
protection during installation.
Protect plastic insulation as follows:
L. Do not expose to sunlight, excePt to extent necessary
for period of instal-lation and concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at atf times. Do not deLiver
plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of
install-ation time.
3. Complete installation and conceal-ment of plastic
materials as rapdily as possible in each area of
construction.
2 - PRODUCTS
INSULATING MATERIALS
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with
requirements and with referenced standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated'
.selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses'
widths, and lengths.
Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigi-d, cellular
polystyrene thermal insulation with closed-ce11s andj-ntegral high density skin. formed by the expansion of
polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply
with ASTM C 5?8 for type indicated; with S-year aged
r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F (4.4 and 23.9 deg
c), respectively; and as fol-l-ows:
1. Type IV, 1.6 Pcf min. densitY,
indicated.
unless otherwise
BUILDING INSULATION o12L0 - 2
n
A
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
Extruded Potystyrene Board Insulation (for exterior
perimeter below grade foundation walls) : Rigid, cellufar
ihermaf insufation expanded polystyrene to comply with FS
HH-I-524, for type indicated; and as foflows:
1. Type IV, 2.0 psi compressive strength K=0'20'
polyisocyanurate Board InsuLation (for the inside of al-1
exterior concrete walls) : Rigj-d, cel-l-u1ar thermal-
insulation with glass-fiber-reinforced polyisocyanulate
closed-cell foam core and aluminum foil facing l-aminated
to both sides; complying with FS HH-I-L}?2/I, Class 2'
aged r-values of 8 and 7.2 at 40 and'r-5 deg F (4'4 and
23.9 deg C), respectively; and as foll-ows:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread
and smoke developed values of 20 and 200,
respectlvelY.
Faced Mineraf Fiber Blanket/Batt lnsulation (for
application in alf exterior walf stud walls and roof to
tulf tfrickness of cavity) : Thermal insulation produced by
combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosettj-ng resj-ns to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type
III, Cl_ass A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder
membrane facing with fl-ame spread of 25 or less);
foi]-scrim-kraft or foi-l--scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder
membrane on one face, and as follows:
1. Comply with HH-I-szI K value of O-2'7
3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present,
for compliance with requj-rements of the sections in which
substrates and related work are specified and to determine
if other conditions affecting performance of insufation
are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of
insufation until unsatlsfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATlON
clean substrates of substances harmful to insul-ations or
vapor retarders, including removal of projections that
might puncture vapor retarders.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
comply with insulation nanufacturerrs j-nstructions
applilaUt-e to products and application indicated' If
printed instructions are not available or do not appl-y to
broject conditions, consuft manufacturer's technlcal
PART
J.I
A.
5.2
BUILDING INSULATION o'72L0 - 3
AA
3.5
Irepresentative for specific recommendations before I
proceeding with installation of insulation.
Extend insulation fuLL thickness as indicated to envelop
entire area to be insul-ated. Cut and fi-t tightly around
obstructions, and fiIl voj-ds with insulation. Remove
projections that interfere with placement.
Apply a si-ngle layer of insulation of requi-red thickness'
unless otherwise shown or required to make up total
thickness.
INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER INSUIATION
On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in
accordance wlth manufacturer's instructions. Use type of
adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation.
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
App1y insulation unj.ts to substrate by method indicated,
complying with manufacturert s recommendations.
Seal- joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation
units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of
each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into
place.Fi1l voids in completed instaLl-ation with
adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
PROTECTION
General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to
harmful weather exposuresr physical abuse, and other
causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation wiLf be subject to abuse and cannot be
concealed and protected by permanent construction
irnmediately after installation.
END OF SECTION O72LO
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
B.
A.
A.
B.
A.
BUILDING INSULATION 072L0 - 4
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
SECTTON 07242 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM
PART ]- - GENERAI.,
L.1-
L.2
l_.J
RELATED DOCT]MENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
Generaf and SupplemenEary CondiEions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to work of this sectlon.
SI]MMARY
This Section includes the following:
l-. Applications over gypsum sheathing.
Related Sections: The fotlowing sections contain
requirements thaE relate to this section:
1 . Division ? Sectsion ",Joint Sealersrr f or requirements
specified by reference in this section for sealing
joints in system witsh elastomeric joint sealants.
2. Division ? Section ".ToinE Sealers" for sealing joints in
syslem with elasEomeric joint sealants.
3. Division 9 SecEion "Glpsum Sheathing" for sheathing
behind system.
DEFINITIONS
Exterior insuLation and finish systems refer to exterior
assemblies composed of an inner layer of board insulation
and an outer layer composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced
base coat applied directly to board insulation and a
textured protective finish coat. These assemblies are
applied to supporting subsErates of construcEion j-ndicated.
Designation PM for class of exterior insulation and finish
systems specified in this section is based on the
cLassification developed by the Exterior Insulation
Manufacturers AssociaEion (EIMA) .
C. System in this section refers to Cl-ass PM exEerior
insulation and finish svstems.
A.
A.
p
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I EXTERIOR INST'LATION AIiID FINISIT SYSTEMS - CI,ASS PM 07242 - r
System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior
insulation and finish systems.
Thermal- resistivity of the insuLation board is designated by
an r-value that represents the reciprocaL of thermal
conductivity (k-value) . ThermaL conductiviLy is the rate of
heat fl-ow through a homogenous materiaL exactly 1 inch
thick. Thermal resistivity (r-value) is expressed by the
temperature difference between the two exposed faces
required to cause one BTU to flow through l- square foot per
hour at mean temperaEures indicated.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide system complying with the following performance
requirements:
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system
componentrs or between system and support ing wal1
construction, resultsing from exposure to fire, wind
loads, weaEher, or other in-service conditions.
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from
exterior inEo sysEem and assemblies behind j-c or through
them into interior of building that results in
deterioration of Ehermal--insulat.ing effectiveness or
other degradation of system and assemblies behind eystem
including substrates, supporting wall construction, and
interior finish.
3. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide maEerials and
construction that are identical to those tesEed for Ehe
following fire performance characteri.sEics, P€r test
method indicated below, by UL or other tesEing and
inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identsify materials witsh appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting
organization.
a. F1ame Spread of Tnsulation Board and Finish Coats:
25 or less when tested individually per ASTM E 84.
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions
of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each component of exterior insulation and
finish systems.
1.4
t_ .5
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
D.
A,
EXTERIOR INSI'LATION AND FINTSH SYSTEMS - CI,ASS PM 07242 - 2
D.
E.
F.
A.
B.
n
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.6
Samples for inicial selection purposes ln torm or
manufacturer's standard color charts and smal}-scafe samples
indicating available textural choices.
1. Incorporate wj-thin each sample a typicaL control joint
filled with sealant of color indicated or selected'
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in
"Quality Assurance" Articfe to demonstrate their
capabiLities and experience. Incfude list of completed
projects with project names, addresses, names of Architect.s
and Owners, plus oEher information specified.
lnstaller certificates signed by manufacturer certifying
Lhat Installers comply with requirements under "Quality
Assurance " Articl-e .
product test reports from and based on tests performed by
qualified independent testsing laboratory evidencing
compliance of components and systems with reguirements based
on comprehensive testing within lasE 3 years of current
product formufat,ions and systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qual-ifications: Engage a firm experienced in
manufacturing systems that are si-milar to those indicated
for this ProjecE and that have a record of successful
in-service performance.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced lnsEaller
who has completed systems similar in material, design, and
extent to thaE indicated for Project that have resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system
from either a single manufacturer or manufacturers approved
by the system manufacturer as compatible with other system
components.
Field-const,ructed Mock-up: Prior to install-ation of system,
erece mock-ups for each form of walI construction and finish
required to verify selecEions made under sample submitEal-s
and Eo demonscraEe esthetic effects including those related
to execution. Build mock-ups to compl-y with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final work:
EXTERIOR INSI'I,ATION A}ID FINISH SYSTEMS - CL,ASS PM 07242 - 3
Locate mock-ups on site in }ocation and of size
indicat.ed or, if not indicated, ds directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and
times when mock-ups will be erecEed.
Demonstrate tshe proposed range of color, texture, and
workmanship to be expected in completed work'
Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start
of final work.
a. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time
of Subst.antial Completion may become part of Icompletsed work.
I
MANUFACTT'RERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject co compliance with
reguiremenEs, manufacturers offering Cfass PM systsems thaE
may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited
to the following:
1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
2. Thoro SYstem Products.
I
I
I
I
1.
2.
4.
t.7
l_.t'
PART
z.L
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. EnvironmenEal Conditions: Do not insEall system when
ambient outdoor temperatures are 40 deg F (S deg C) and
falling unless temporary protection and heat are provided to
maintain ambient temperaEures above 40 deg F (4 deg C)
during installation of wet materials and until- they have
dried thoroughly and become hreather resistant, but for not
less than 24 hours after installation.
SEQUENCING A}ID SCHEDI'I,ING
sequence instaflation of system with related work specified
in other sections co ensure that wall assemblies, including
flashing, trim, and joint seal-ers' are protsecEed against
damage from weather, aging, corrosion, and other causea'
2 - PRODUCTS
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
A.
EXTERIOR INSI'I.ATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CI.ASS PM 07242 - 4
A.
B.
D.
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
2.2 MATERIALS
Compatibility: Provide board insulation, reinforcing
fabric, base and finish coat materials, mechanical anchors'
and accessories that are compaEible with one another and
approved for use by system manufacturer'
provide color and texture of protective coating to comply
with the following requirements:
1. Provide sefecEion made by Architect from manufacturerrs
full range of standard col-ors and textures available for
tlpe of finish coat indicated.
Extsruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, ceflular
thermal insulation with closed ceIls and integral
high-density skin, formed by uhe expansion of polystyrene
base resin in an extrusion process to comply with AS'fM C 578
for Type Iv; with 1.6 pcf minimum density and 5-year aged
r-value of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F (4'4 and 23'9 deg
C); approved by system manufacturer for material qualities
including corner squareness and other dimensionaL
tolerances; in manufacturerts standard lengths and widths;
thickness as indicatsed.
Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave
glass fiber fabrj.c treated for compatibility with other
system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with
tlnsile strength of not less than 120 lbs' and l-40 1bs' in
warp and fill directions, respectively, per ASTM D 1682 and
complying with ASTM D 578, and of the following minimum
weight:
1. 4-30 oz. Per sq. Yd-
Base coat Materials: system manufacturer's standard mj-xture
complying with the following requirements for material
composition and method of combining materials:
l-. Either job-mixed or facEory-mixed formulation indicated
above.
Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Finish Coat Materials:
System manufacturerts standard mixture complying with the
following requirements for material composition and method
of combining materials:
L. Job-mixed or factory-mixed formulation indicated above.
EXTERIOR INSULATION A}iID FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 5
2. Top Coat for Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Finish ICoat: Where required by system manufacturer, provide
facEory-mixed pigmented polymer-based formulation
G. Acrylic-Based Finish Coat: System manufacturerrs standard
I
factory-mixed formulaEion of acrylic emulsion, colorfast
mineral pigmenEs, and fine aggregates. I
H. Water: Clean and potable.
I . Mechanical FasEeners: System manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant fasLener assemblies, complete with rsystem manufacturer's standard washer attachments, selected
for properties of pu1lout, tensile, and shear strength I
required to resist design l-oads of application indicated, I
capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulaEion
board, and of the following description:
I
1. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 inch to 0.L12
inch in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying
with ASTM C 954. I
2. For attachment to light-gage steel framing members (not
less than 0.0L79 inch in thickness) , provide steel drilL
screws complying with ASTM C l-OO2
.I . Trim Accessories: Matserial as indicated below and tytrre as Idesignated or required to suit conditions indicated and
comply with system manufacturerrs requirements; manufactured Ifrom zlnc al1oy; coordinate depth of accessories with I
thickness of base and finish coats required.
1. Control ,Joints: Prefabricated, one-piece Eype I
manufacEured with expanded metal flanges, formed to
provide doubLe keying action with protective coating,
extending only to face of insulation; with removable I
tape on plasEer face and 1/4-inch joint sightline and
bellows configuration as indicated below, I
2. corner Bead: Prefabricated small-nosed corner bead with
expanded metal flanges extending minimum of 2-7/8 inches rfrom corner .
3. Casing Bead: PrefabricaEed one-piece type for I
attachment to surface of insulation or behind
insulation, of depth required to suiE thickness of
coaEing, and where att,ached behind insulaEion, thickness I
of insulation as weII.
I
I
01242 - .
I
EXTERIOR INSUT,ATION AIiID FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM
A.
B.
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3 EI-,ASTOMERIC SEALANTS
sealant Product: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically
curj-ng, elasLomeric sealant that is listed and recommended
by system manufacLurer for use indicated, is compatible with
joint filLers, joint substrates, and other re]ated
maEeriaLs, and complies with requiremenEs of Division 7
section "Joint sealers" for products corresponding co
description indicated beIow.
l-. Multipart Nonsag Urethane SeaLant.
sealant Col_or: Provide color of exposed sea]ants to comply
with the following requirement:
1. Match finish coat color of sysEem.
2.4 MIXING
A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's reguirements for
combining and mixing materials.Do not introduce
admixtures, waEer, or other maEerials excePt as approved by
system manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use
materials within Eime period specified by system
manufacturer or discard.
3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINAT]ON
Examine subsErates, \^rith Inst.alfer presenE, to determine if
they are in satisfactory condition for insLallation of
system. Do not proceed with installation of system until
unsatisfacEory condieions have been corrected'
PREPARATION
Protect cont.iguous work from moisture det.erioration and
soiling resulEing from applicaEion of systems. Provide
temporary covering and other protection needed t.o prevent.
spaLt,ering of exterior finish coatings on other work'
PART
5.J.
A.
5.2
EXTERIOR INSI'LATTON A}ID FINISH SYSTEMS - CI.,ASS PM u lz+z - I
3.3
proEect sysEem, substrates, and wa1I const.ruction behind
them from incl-ement weat.her during instal-lation. Prevent
infittratlon of moisture behind sysEem and deterioration of
substrates.
1. Apply surface sealer over substrates where required by
system manufacturer for improving adhesion'
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with system manufacturerrs currenE
published instruct,ions for insLallation of system as
applicable to each type of substrate indicated'
Mechanically attach insulation Uo substrate by method
complying with system manufacturer's current requirements.
Inltially install approximately 5O percent of the total
number of fasEeners required prior to application of
reinforcing fabric. Install remainder after application of
reinforcing fabric.
1. Space fasteners as indicated below:
a. Vertsically: Not more than 12 inches o.c' nor more
Ehan 12 inches from bottom edge of starting course
of insuLation board.
b. Horizontally: NoE more than 24 inches o'c' to
match stud sPacing.
c. secure mechanical fasteners to framing members
behind sheathed substrates so that they penetrate
framing members 5/8 inch or more and recess flush
with exterior surface of insulation board'
2. Apply boards over dry substrates in courses with long
edges oriented horizontsally; begin first course from a
level base line and work uPwards.
3. Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce
running bond Pattern.
a. Offset joints of
sheathing.
insulation from joints in
4. Interlock ends at internal and externa] corners'
5. Abut boards tight.ly at. joints within and between each
course to produce fIush, continuously even surfaces
without gaps. or raised edges beEween insulation boards.
If gaps occur, fill with insulation cut to fiE gaps
exactly; insert without use of adhesive '
I
I
I
t
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
P,
B.
EXTERIOR INSUI,ATION AND FTNISH SYSTEMS - CI'ASS PM 07242 - I
6.
7.
c
1.
c.
D.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to
remove irregulari-ties projecting more than L/L6 inch
from surface of insul-ation and yeLlowed areas due to sun
exposure; do not create depressions deeper than L/r6
inch.
Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections
precisely and to produce edges and shapes conformi-ng to
details indicated
Coordinate flashing instatlaEion with installation of
insulation to produce a wall system that does not allow
\^rater to penetrate behind protective coating.
Instal] expansion joints at locations indicated and as
follows:
1.
z.
Where expansion or control joints occur in surface of
construction directly behind insulation.
Where system abuts dissimilar materiaLs -
Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps of
width needed between adjoining insulaEion edges as wel-I
as between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining
surfaces projecting Ehrough insulation Ehat produce
joint widths indicated after encapsulaEion of joinc
subst.rates with base coat, reinforcing fabric, and
finish coat.
InstaII control joints at l-ocations indicated or, if not
indicated, ?E locations complying with the following
criteria and approved by Architect:
Where distance beEween control joinEs exceeds 10'-0t' in
any direction.
Above and beLow door and window openings.
TreaE exposed edges of insulation to comply with system
manufacEurer' s directions.
F. Cover insulation with reinforcing fabric and attach through
insul-ation into substrate by installing remainder of
fasteners.
G. Trowel-app1y base coat over and into reinforcing fabric in
thickness specified by system manufacturer to produce a
flush, uniform surface with fabric fully embedded and
prepared to receive finish coaE.
EXTERIOR INSUI,ATION AIiID FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 01242 - 9
Apply acrylic finish coaE over cured base coat in thickness
specified by sysEem manufacturer to produce a uniform finish
of texture and cofor matching approved sample.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Remove temporary covering and proEection of other work.
Promptly remove protective coatings from window and door
frames and any other surfaces outside areas indicated to
receive protectsive coating.
Provide final proEection and maintain conditions in a manner
acceptable to Installer and systsem manufacEurer Ehat ensures
systems being without damage or det,erioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07242
IH.
3.4
A.I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
IEXTERIOR INSI'I,ATION AIID FINISH SYSTEMS - CIJASS PM 01242 - LO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07411 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
I.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section incl-udes the following:
1. Standing-seam roof panels.
B. Related Sections incLude the following:
1. Division 5 Section "structural steel" for structural-
steel framing.
2. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for
metal framing.
3. Divisi-on 6 Slction "Rough Carpentry" for wood frami'ng
and sheathing.4. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for
flashing not part of roofing and other sheet metal
work.5. Division ? Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied
sealants.
1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies
complying with performance requirements indicated and
capibie -of withJtanding structural movement, thermally
induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into the building interior'
B. Air Infiltration:Provide manufactured roof Panel
assembfies with permanent resj-stance to air leakage through
assembly of not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft- (0.45 L/s/sq' m)
of fixel roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at a
static-air-pressure difference of 4.0 lbflsq. ft. ll92 Pa) '
C. ?later Penetration:Provide manufactured roof Panel
assemblies with no water penetration as defined in the test
method when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at a minimum
differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting, wild;
load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lb/sq- ft. (300
Pa) and not more than l-2.0 l-b/sq. ft. (575 Pa) -
MANU FACTUPAD ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
E.
(.
Wi-nd-Uplift Resistance: Provide roof paneL assemblies that
meet requirements of UL 580 for CLass 90 wind-uplift
resistance.
Structural- Performance: Provide rnanufactured roof panel
assemblies capable of safely supporting design loads
indicated under in-service conditlons with verticaf
deffection no greater than the following, based on testing
manufacturer's standard units according to ASTM E 1592 by a
qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Maximum Deflection: 1/180 of the span.
2. Maxi-mum Deffection: L/140 of the span.
1a
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data:lncl-ude manufacturer's product
specifications, standard details, certified product test
results, and general recommendations, as applicable to
materiafs and finishes for each component and for totaf
panel assemblies.
Shop Drawings: Show layouts of panels on roofs, details of
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, supports'
anchorages, trim, flashings' underlayment, closures, snow
guards, and special details. Distinguish between factory-
and field-assembled work.
1. For j-nstal1ed products indicated to comply with certain
design loadings, include structural analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for t.heir preparation.
Samples for Verification: Provide sample panels 1-2 inches
(300 nm) tong by actual- panel width, in the profile, style,
color, and texture indicated. Include clips, caps, battens,
fasteners, closures, and other exposed panel accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer
who has completed metal- roof panel projects similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional
engineer who is lega}1y qualified to practice i-n the
jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind
i-ndicated.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 01 ALL-2
B.
?
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by deslgn
designatj-ons in UL's 'iFire Resistance Directory" or in
the iisting of another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction'
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Defiver panels and other components so they wil-1 not be
damaged or deformed. Package panels for protection against
damage during transportation or handling.
Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erectlng
roof pinels to prevent bending, warping, twisting' and
surface damage.
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with
tarpaulins or other suj-tabIe weatherti-ght and ventilated
covlring. Store panels to ensure dry,ness' Do. not store
panels -in contact with other materials that might cause
Itaining, denting, or other surface damage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: verify locatlon of structural members
and openings in substrate! by field measurements before
fabricition and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings-
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work'
1. EstabLished Dimensions: where field measurements
cannot be made without delaying the Work, either
establ-ish opening dj'mensions and proceed with
fabricating roof panels without field measurements or
allow for trimminq panel units. Coordinate roof
constructi-on to ensure actuaL focations of structural
members and to ensure openi-ng dimensions correspond to
estabLished dimensions.
A,
],. 6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranti-es specified in thj-s
Article sha1l nbt deprive the owner of other rights the
Owner may have undei other provisions 9f the Contract
Documents and sha}l be in addition to, and run concurrent
with, other warranties made by the contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents'
B. Special Finish warranty: submit a written warranty, signed
by manufacturer, cove-ring failure of the factory-apPl+tq
eiterior finish on metal roof panels within the specified
warranty period and agreeing to lep-a.ir. finish or replace
roof pineis that show evidence of finish deteriorati-on-
Deterioration of finish includes, but is not limited to,
I
MANUFACTURED RooF PANEIS 07 411. - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
D.
E.
color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film
i nt- arrri f rrf.revY53vJ.
Finish warranty Period: 20 years from date of substantial
Completion.
Special Weathertight Warranty:
executed by manufacturer agreeing
roof panel assemblY that fails to
the specified warrantY Period'
Weathertight WarrantY Period:
Substantial ComPletion.
2 - PRODUCTS
a. AEP-Span.b. Berridge Manufacturing Co.
c. Butler Manufacturing Co.
d. Metal Building ComPonents'
e. Modern Metal SYstems, Inc.
f. Robertson: H.H. Robertson
S. Smith Steelite' Inc.
Submit a written warrantyto repair or replace metal
remain weathertight within
5 vears from date of
Company.
PART
2.1
A.
z.z
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering metal panels that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Steel Roof Panel-s:
a. Berridge Cee-Lock Snap-Lock Standinq Seam
The following manufacturers may submit their products for
approval in -accordance with Division 1 Section, "Product
Substitutions. ":
1. Steel Roof Panels:
METALS AND FINISHES
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating:
Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and
prepainted by the coil-coating process to . comply with
Asrfu n zSS (ASTM A 755M) and the following requirements:
1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792,
Class AZ-50 coating, Grade 40 (ASTM A 192M, C1ass AZ-
150 coating, Grade 2751 ; structural quality'
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 0't 471- - 4
a.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
z.J
A.
ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES
Standing-Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-
formed, standing-seam roof panel assembly designed fot
concealed mechanicaf attachment of panels to roof purlins or
deck.
L. Clips: Provide minimum 0.0525-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick,
stainl-ess-steel panel clips designed to meet negative-
load requirements.2. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum
0 . 025O-inch- (0 . 65-rnm- ) thick, stainless-steel or
nylon-coated aluminum sheets.
Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System:
Manufacturer's standard 2-coaE, thermocured system
composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer
and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less
than 70 p-ercent polyvinylidene ffuorlde resin by
weight with a total minimum dry film thickness of
0.9 mil (0.023 mm) and 30 percent reffective gJ-oss
when tested according to ASTM D 523.
1) Durability: Provide coating field tested under
normal range of weather conditions for a
minimum of 20 years without significant peel'
blister, fl-ake, chip, crack, or check in
finish; without chalking in excess of a chalk
rating of 8 according to ASTM D 42L4; and
without fading in excess of 5 Hunter units.
2) Color to be Interstate Green, UC#51524.
1. Avail-able Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with reguirements,
provide one of the following:
a. Bituthene Ice and Water Shield; Grace: Vi.R. Grace
& Co.
b. Polyguard Deck Guard,' Polyguard Products, Inc.
c. Polyken 640 Underlayment Membrane; Polyken
2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, Polymer-Modified, Bitumi-nous Sheet
Underlayment: ASTM D 1g't0, minimum of 40 mils (1 run) thlck.
Provide primer when recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
Technologies.d. Jiffy Seal Ice and Watere. Ice Guard Membrane
Laboratories, Inc.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
Guard; Protecto WraP Co.
No. 108-AG; Royston
07411 - 5
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
!
I
I
I
I
I
T
B.
D.
MlSCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
General-: Provide materiafs and accessories required for a
complete roof panel assembly and as recommended by panel
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
Accessories: Unl-ess otherwise specified, provide components
required for a compJ-ete roof panel assembly including trim,copings, fasciae, mullions, sil-Is, corner units, ridgeclosures, clips, seam covers, battens, fJ-ashings, gutters,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, cLosure strips, and similaritems. Match materials and finishes of panels.
1. Cl-osure Strips:CIosed-ce1l-, self-extinguishing,
expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyoJ-efin-
foam flexibl-e closure strips. Cut or premold to matchconfiguration of panels. Provide cl-osure strips whereindicated or necessary to ensure weathertight
construction.2. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids,polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with rel-easepaper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,nontoxic, nonstaining tape.3. Efastomeric Joint Sealant:ASTM C 920, of basepolymer, tlpe, grade, class, and use cLassificationsrequired to seal joints in panel roofing and remainweathertight. Provide sealant recommended by panel
manufacturer.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thicknessper coat, unLess otherwise indicated. Provide inert-typenoncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deLeterious impurities.
Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units desj.gned to
use with roof panels and complete wj-th predrilled holes or
hooks for anchori-nq.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. GeneraL: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at thefactory to greatest extent possj-b1e, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfillindicated performance reguirements demonstrated by
Iaboratory testing. Comp1y with indicated profiles and wj-th
dimensional and structural reguirements.
B. Sound Control:lVhere sound-absorption requirement isindicated, fabricate interior liner panels with L/8-inch-
(3-mm-) diameter hoLes uniformly spaced approximately 1000holes per square foot (10 750 holes per square meter).
Cover insulation with polyethylene film and provide insertsof wire mesh to form acoustical spacer qrid.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS o"t 4t1. - 6
a
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
PART
3.1
A.
5-Z
A.
Fabricate panel joj-nts with captive gaskets or separatorstrips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metalcontact, in a manner that wil-I minimize noi-se from movementswithin panel assembly.
3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements indicated for conditionsaffecting performance of metal panel roofing.
1. Panel Supports and Anchorage: Examj-ne roof framing toveri-fy that purlins, angfes, channeLsf and othersecondary structural panel support members and
anchorage have been instaLled according to writtenlnstructions of panel manufacturer.2. Do not proceed with roof panel instalLation untilunsatisfactorv conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Coordinate metal panel roofing with rai-n drainage work;flashing; trim; and construction of decks, parapets, walls,
and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and
noncorrosive installation.
Promptly remove protective film, if dny, from exposed
surfaces of metal panels. Strip with care to avoid damageto finish.
n
permitted.
2. Instal-l panels with
otherwise i-ndicated.
I4ANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
Secondary Structural Supports:and other secondary structural
anchorage according to the Light
"Gulde Specifications. " Section
and Wall Panels."
PANEL INSTAILATION
Instal-1 purlins, bracing,panel support members and
Gage Structural lnstj-tute's
01 4t0, "Manufactured Roof
concealed fasteners. unless
General:Comply wj-th panel manufacturer's written
instructions and recommendations for install-ation, asapplicable to project conditions and supporting substrates.
Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely inpIace, with provisions for thermal and structuraL movement.
1. Field cuttinq exterior panel-s bv torch is not
07411 - 7
3. Install panels with exposed exterior and interior
fasteners, prefinished to match panel finishes.
Install panels over solid substrate with minimum 3zl2(1:4) slope. Install 1 ply of felt from lower edge up'
with at least 3-inch (75-mm) side laps and -inch (l-00-
mm) end laps.
Accessories: Instal-l- components required for a complete
roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, ridge
closures, clips, seam covers' battens' flashings, gutters'
sealants, gaskets, fill-ers, closure strips, and similar
items.
Joint Sealers: fnstall gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants
where indlcated and where required for weatherproof
performance of panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets'
fil-l-ers, and sealants indicated or t if not otherwise
indicated, types recommended by panel manufacturer.
1. InstaII weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal
panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other
cLosures to excfude weather.
2. Seal panel end laps with doubl-e beads of tape or
sealant, full width of panel. SeaI side joints where
recommended by panel manufacturer. I3. Prepare joints and aPply sealants to comply with I
requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Standing-Seam Roof Panel Assembly: Fasten panels to
supports with concealed clip according to panel
manufacturer's written instructions.
lnstalf clips at each support with self-drilIing/self-
tapping fasteners.
At end laps of panels, install tape cal-k between
oanels.
3. Install factory-calked cleats at standing-seam joints.
Apply snap-on batten to panels to provide a
weathertight joint.
4. Searning: Complete seaming of panel joints by operating
portable power-driven equipment of type recommended by
panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight joint.
Instaflation Tolerances: Shim and alj-gn panel units within
instatfed tolerance of l/4 inch in 20 feet (6 run in 6 m) on
slope and l-ocation lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch
(3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of
matching profiles.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Damaged Units: Replace paneJ-s and other comPonents of the
Work that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
?A
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,L-
2.
n
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074il. - 8
t
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
END
Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and
strippable films, if dnY, as soon as each panel is
instltteA. On completion of panel installation' cfean
finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer and
maintain in a clean condition during constructj-on.
OF SECTION 07411
MANUFACTURED ROOF PA}IELS U I{ILL -
'
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
PART 1
1.1
A.
SECTION 07530 _ SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOF]NG
L-Z
- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditlons and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to thls Section.
SUMMARY
This Section incLudes single-ply membrane roofing systems.
Types of roofing systems specified in this Section using
single-ply roofing membranes include the following:
1. Loosely laid and balfasted systems.
Single-ply roofing membranes include the folLowing:
L. Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) .
Roof insulation related to single-ply membrane roofing 1s
specified in this Section.
Wood nai-Iers, blockj-ng, and other related items are
specified in Division 6.
Copings are specified in another Division 7 Section.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
Product data, instaLl-ation instructions, and general
recommendations from manufacturer of single-pIy membrane
system for types of roofing required. Incl-ude data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
Samples of finished roofj.ng sheets, including T-shaped
side/end-Iap seam. Also include the following:
1. Aggregate bal-Last to show type, shape, cofor.
2. Paver to show size, color.
3 . Insul-ation board.
Shop drawings showing roof configuration, sheet Iayout,
seam focations, colors (as apPllcabfe) ' details at
perimeter, and special conditions.
L. Indicate layout of tapered insulation rnaterials.
A.
A.
B.
D.
(-
n
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - I
1A
1.5
Pre-roofing conference records.
Test data for pullout resistance of fastening systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer: Obtain primary single-ply membrane roofing
from a slngle manufacturer. Provide secondary materials
as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials '
B. Installer:Engage an experienced Install-er that has
specialized 1n instal-Iing roofing systems similar to those
required for this Project. Installer must be acceptable
to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing
material.
Pre-Roofing Conference: Before installing roofing and
associated Work, meet at mutually agreed l-ocation with
Instalter, roofing manufacturer, installers of related
work, and other entities concerned with roofing
performance, including governing authorities' Architect'
and Owner. Record discussions and agreements and furnish
copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours
advance notice to participants prior to convening
pre-roofing conference.
UL Listing: Provide label-ed materials that have been
tested and listed by UL in "Building Materials Directory"
or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory for
Class A rated materials/sYstem.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Weather: Proceed with roofing work when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed
in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and
warranty requirements.
Substrate Conditions: Do not begin roofing instaflation
until substrates have been inspected and are determined to
be 1n satj-sfactorY condition.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer's WarrantY Perlod:
Substantial ComPletion.
10 years from date of
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
F
n
A.
A.
B.Installerrs Warranty Period: 2 years
MRCA form (Midwest Roofing Contractors
from submitted on an
Association) .
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights
the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and wiLl be in addition to and run concurrent
STNGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 2
A,
P,
D.
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
PART
a1
2.2
with other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
2 - PRODUCTS
GENERAL
CompatibiJ-ity:Provide products recommended bY
manufacturers to be fulty compatible wlth j-ndicated
substrates. Provide separation material-s as required to
eliminate contact between incompatible materials.
EPDM MEMBRANE
General: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into
uniform, ffexibLe sheets, complying with ASTM D 463'7,
Type 1.
1. Thickness: 45 mils, nomlnal-.
2. Exposed Face Color: Manufacturer's standard.
Loose-Laid and Balfasted EPDM Membrane: Manufacturer's
standard instal-f ation.
Avail,able Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not
Iimited to, the following:
a. American Hydrotech, Inc.
b. Carlisl-e Syntec Systems.
c. Firestone Building Products Co.
d. Goodyear Tire & Rubber Co.
e. Kelly Energy Systems, Inc.
t. Manville Building Materials Corp.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard materials
for sealing lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover
exposed spliced edges as recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips, and Flashing
Accessories: T)pes recommended by membrane manufacturer,
including adhesive tapes, flashing cements, and sealants.
Flashing MateriaL: Manufacturer's standard system
compatible with single-ply membrane.
Aggregate Surface Ballast: Washed, rounded, riverbed
gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced stone ranging in
size from 1 to 2 inches in diameter. Provide aggregate
2.3
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING U/f,JU - J
2.4
2.5
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
E.
A.
F,
A.
that will withstand weather exposure without significant
deterioration and wi-11 not contribute to membrane
degradation.
Concrete Paver Walkway: Prefabrj-cated concrete pavers
designed specifi-ca1ly for singly-ply membranes. Provide
uniti with subsurface drainage channefs, weighing
approximately 12 psf with minimum 2500-psi compressive
strength.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with
requi-rements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work j-nclude, but are not limited to, the following:
a. RoofbLok Ballast Ssytem, Roofblok Ltd.
b. BaLfast Paver, Westile, Inc.
INSULATING MATERIALS
General: Provide insulating materials to comply with
requirements indicated for materials and with referenced
stindards in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected
from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and
lengths.
1. Provide tapered boards where indicated for sloping to
drain. Fabricate with taper of l/4 inch Per foot,
unless otherwise indicated.
Tapered Perl-1te Board Roof Insulation: Rigid boards
pr-oduced by combining expanded perlite and fibers with
tind"t", coated or impregnated one side, to comply with
ASTM C ?28; r-value of 2.?8 at 75 deg F (23.9 deg C) with
sealed top surface, FS-HH-I-529, k-val-ue of 0.35'
Polyisocyanurate Board Roof Insulation: Rigid, ce1lul-ar'
theimal insulation with polylsocyanurate closed-cell- foam
core and manufacturer's standard facing faminated to both
sides; thickness as shown on drawings; complying with FS
HH-I-1972/2, Class 1.
AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS
Adhesive for Bondinq Insufation: Type recommended by
insulation manufacturer and complying with fire-resistance
requirements.
Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation
manufacturer for bonding edge joints and filting voids'
Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion-resistant type
recommended by insulation manufacturer for deck type'
aq
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 4
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
Thermal Barrier: Provide 5/8" gtypsum board, ASTM C 36,
Type X, where required to meet UBC 17.f3(e)3.
3 - EXECUTION
PREPARING SUBSTRATE
General:CompLv with manufacturers I instructions to
prepare substrate to receive slngle-ply membrane system.
1. Verify that penetrations, expansion joints, and
blocking are i-n place and secured and that roof drains
are properly clamped into position.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances
detrimentaL to single-ply system installation. Remove
sharp projections.
InstalL cant strips, flashings, and accessory items as
shown and as recommended bv manufacturer.
Install thermaL barri.er loose-1aved over deckinq when
required to meet UBC 1?.13 (e) 3.
INSTALLING INSULATION
General: Extend insulation fulf thickness in two layers,
or in multiple layers over entire surface to be insulated,cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. Form
cant strips, crickets, saddles, and tapered areas wlth
additj-onal rnaterial as shown and as requi-red for proper
drainage of membrane.
1 . Stn.r.rrr i r:i nlig in
multiple Iayers,
between courses
thermal envelope.
2. Provide tapered
indicated.
Do not instalL more insulation in a day than can be
covered with membrane before end of dav or before start of
inclement weather.
Set insulation units on substrate with mechani-ca1
fasteners or spot adhesives and cover immediately with
l-oose membrane for ballasted installation.
Provide protection sheet between insulation and membrane
when recommended bv membrane manufacturer.
INSTALLING MEMBMNE
D.
PART
3.1
A.
J.l
J.J
B.
rr
one direction for each course. For
stagger joints in both dlrections
with no 9aps, to form a complete
units to suit drainaqe pattern
B.
D.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 5
I
t
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
T
T
t
I
I
T
I
A.
A.
General-: Start instal-Lation only in
manufacturer's technicaL representative.
presence of
1 Cut out and repair membrane defects at the end of each
day's work.
Loose-Laid and Ballasted: fnstall membrane by unrolling
over prepared substrate, fastening at perimeter and at
roofing penetrations. Lap adjoining sheets and bond,
covering top edges of each sheet at seams with uniform
fillet of sealant as recommended by manufacturer. Install
flashings and counterflashings as shown and as recommended
bv manufacturer .
Applv ballast according manufacturer t s
instructlons.
C. Walkway Protection:
3.4
InstalI paver units at locations
shown and where required for access to roof-mounted
eguipment. Pl-ace protection boards carefully to avoid
damage to membrane, Iaying over an additional Iayer of
roof membrane material, loosely appli-ed, for additional
protection.
PROTECTING ROOFING
After completing roofing (j-ncluding associated work) .
i-nstitute appropriate procedures for surveillance and
protection of roofing during remainder of construction
period. At the end of the construction period, or at a
time when remaining construction will in no way affect or
endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and
prepare a written report to Owner, describing nature and
extent of deterioration or damage found.
Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective
work found at the time of final inspection to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at the time of
Substantiaf Completion and according to the requirements
of the specified warrantY.
END OF SECTION 07530
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 6
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 0?600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. ]. REI,ATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawi-ngs and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to work of this Secti-on.
I.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section incl-udes the following:
1. Metal counter flashing and base flashing.
2. MetaL wal-l- flashing and expansion joints.
3. Buift-in metal valleys, gutters, and scuppers.
4. Exposed metal trim,/fascia units.
5. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories.
B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as masonry work
in sections of Division 4.
C. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing
membrane are specified in roofing system sections as
roofing work.
D. Roof accessory units of premanufactured' set-on type are
specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.3 SUBMITTAIS
A. General: Subnit the
Conditions of Contract
Sectlons.
following in accordance with
and Division 1 Specification
B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Meta1, and Accessorj-es:
Manufacturer's technicaf product data, instaLlationj-nstructions and general recommendations for each
specified sheet material and fabricated product.
C. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metaI, and
accessory items:
1. 8-inch-square samples of specified sheet material-s to
be exposed as finished surfaces.
D. Shop drawings showing J.ayout, profiles, methods of
joining, and anchorages details, includj-ng major
counterflashings, trim/fascia unj-ts, gutters, downspouts'
scuppers, and expansion joint systems' Provide layouts at
1/4-inch scafe and details at 3-inch scale.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
FLASHING AND SHEET METAI 07600 - 1
PART
z.r
A.
PART
3.1
A.
Coordinate work of thls section with interfacing and
adjoinj-ng work for proper sequenclng of each instal-l"ation.
Ensure best possible weather resi-stance and durability of
work and protection of material-s and finishes.
2 - PRODUCTS
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quali-ty with 0.20 percent
copper, ASTM A 526 except ASTM A 52'l for Lock-forming, G90
hot-dip gafvanized, mill phosphatized where indicated for
painting; 0.0359-inch thick (20 gaqe) except as otherwise
indicated.
General:Except as otherwise indicated, comply with
manufacturer's installation i-nstructions and
recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural- Sheet Metal
Manuaf." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods
indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units;
conceal fasteners where possible' and set units true to
line and l-evel as indicated. Install- work with laps,
joints, and seams that will- be permanently watertight and
weatherproof.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
D.
B. Adhesives:Type recommended by flashing sheet
manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and
adhesive application of flashing sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions:Where lapped or bayonet-type
expansj-on provisions in work cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints
of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 lnch deep'
fiLLed with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints
are indicated or required for proper performance of work,
form metal to provide for proper installation of
elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations:Provide for separation of metal from
noncompatible metai. or corrosive substrates by coating
concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with
bituminous coating or other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATTON REQUIREMENTS
FLASHING AND SHEET METAI'07600 - 2
C
A.
a
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
5.2
Install- counterfl-ashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal
arrangement or by uslng raggle with lead wedges in place
for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or
efastomeric sealant, as indicated and depending on degree
of sealant exposure.
Naif flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at
maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c' Fabricate seams at
joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap, to form
a continuous, waterproof system.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Cfean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that
might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of
finishes.
Protection: Advj-se Conttactor of required procedures for
survej-1lance and protection of flashings and sheet metal
work during construction to ensure that work will be
without damage or deterioration other than natural
weathering at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07600
FI,ASHING AND SHEET METAI,07600 - 3
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
SECTION 0'7720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including
General and Supplementary conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
L.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof hatches.
B. Related Sections:The following Sectlons contain
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 5 Sections for ladders and support framing'
2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for nailers'
3. Division 7 Section for roofing types and roofing
accessories incl-uded as part of roofing llork.
4. Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for
metaL flashinq.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: submit the following according to conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Speclfication Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. submit
manufacturer's detailed technj-cal product data'
installation instructions and reconmendations, including
details of construction relative to materials, dlmensions
of individual components' profiles, and finishes.
c. shop drawings showing fabrication and instalfation of each
roof accessory specified including fu1ly dimensioned
p1ans, elevations, sections, details of comPonents, and
Ittachments to other units of Work- AIso show layout,
anchorage details, rough-in requirements, and conditions
on the roof or for other accessorles.
1..4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. SMACNA "Architectural sheet Metal Manuaf" details for
fabrication of units, including flanges and
cap-flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
2. NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual-" detaifs for
installation of units.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 01?20 - L
PART
2.r
2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
AvaiLabl-e Manufacturers:to compliance with
products that may be
are not l-imited to,
ASTM A 526
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
D.
E.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Structural-Qual-ity Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446
with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525, Grade C' or to
suit manufacturer's standards.
Subj ect
requi-rements, manufacturers offering
incorporated in the Work include, but
the following:
1. Roof Hatches:
a. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc.
h Ri Inn f-n
c. Dur-Red Products.
d. Hilfsdale Industries.e. Milcor, Inc.
f. O'Keeffe's, Inc.
S. ThyCurb Div./ThyBar Corp.
h. Wasco Products, Inc.
Commercial-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet:
with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525.
Galvalume-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792 with class AZ-50
coating, Grade 40, or to suit manufacturer's standards.
Insul,ation: Manufacture!'s standard rigid or semirigid
glass-fiber board of thickness indicated.
Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with
water-borne preservatives for above-ground use, complying
with AWPA C2; not less than l-l/2 inch thick.
Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastenedr or
nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as
recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed
fasteners with finish of material being fastened.
1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords
access to building, provide nonremovabl-e fastener
heads.
Gaskets: Manufacturerr s standard tubular or fingered
design of neoprene or polyvinyl chLoride' or block design
of sponge neoprene'
ROOF ACCESSORIES 0'7'120 - 2
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5
D.
PART
3.1
A
H.Mastic Sealant:Polyi sobutylene ;nonhardeni-ng,
nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit
manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM
C 920, Type S, Grade NS, CLass 25, and Uses NT, G, and' A.
KUUI NfII UNtiJ
A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-1bf per sq. ft.
externaL loading and 20-Ibf per sq. ft. internal- J-oading
Dressure.Frame with 9-inch-high, j-ntegral-curb,
doubLe-wall construction with 1-112 inch insulation, cant
strips and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing)' with
welded or sealed mechanicaL corner joints.Provide
double-wall cover (Iid) construction with 1 inch
lnsulation core.Provide gasketing and equiP
corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware
including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior
padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch
handfes.
Type: Single-Ieaf personnel access.
l-. For Ladder Access:2 feeE 6 inches bY 3 feet 0 inch'
(.Material: Zinc-coated steel sheets.
Provide optional rectractable safety post
3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
General:Comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate with instalfation of roof
deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, roof
insuLation, roofing and flashing, as required, to ensure
that each element of the Work performs properly and that
combined elements are waterproof and weathertight' Anchor
units securely to supporting structuraL substrates'
adequate to withstand Lateral and thermal stresses' as
well as inward and outward loading pressures.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory
items according to construction details of NRCA
"Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. "
Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be
instafl_ed in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive
substrates, including wood, apply mastic sealant on
concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent
separation.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 0'1'720 - 3
C. Operational Units: Test operate units with operablecomponents. Clean and lubricate Joints and hardware.Adjust for proper operation.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according tomanufacturerrs instructions. Touch up damaged met.al
coatings.
END OF SECTION 07120
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
IROOF ACCESSORIES 07120 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
SECTION
PART 1
1.1
A.
L.Z
This Section includes
locations:
07901 - JOINT SEALANTS
- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract' incJ-uding
General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisj-on 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.joint sealants for the foJ-Iowing
surfaces asZ.
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic
horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
b. Joints between different materials listed above.
c. Perimeter joints between material-s Iisted above
and frames of doors and wlndows.
d. Controf and expansion joints in ceiling and
overhead surfaces.
e. Other joj-nts as indicated.
Exterior -ioints in horizontal traffic
. indicated below:
a. Contro1, expansion, and isolation joints in
r.rqt- i n-nlace concfete s1abS.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Jolnts between different materials listed above.
d. Other joints as indicated.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontaL
nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior
indicated.
openr-ngs wnere
b. Til"e control and expansion joints.
c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces
and frames of interior doors, wlndows, and
elevator entrances.
d. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
e. Other joints as indicated.
Interior joints in horizontaL traffic surfaces as
indicated befow:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-i-n-place
concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in tile floorlng.
JOINT SEAIANTS 07901 - 1
c. Other joints as indicated.
B. Refated sections: The following sectj-ons contain
requirements that relate to this Sectlon:
l.DivisionTSection''FlashingandSheetMetal''for
sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal for
roofing.
2. Divlsion 7 Section "Firestopping" for sealing joints
in rated Partitions.3.DivisionS''GlassandGlazing''forsealantsusedin
glazing -
4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Drywall" for sealing
conceafed perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions
to reduce sound transmission.
5. Division 9 section "Acoustica] Panel-s" for sealing
edge moldings at perimeter of acoustical ceilings'
6. Division 9 Section "Til-e" for sealing tile joints'
3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REOUIREMENTS
A. provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced
and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and
-.i r+i rrhr ^^ntinuous seals without Causing staining orqMrvrr L-
deterioration of joint substrates.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
1..4 SUBMITTALS
A. Generaf: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
Sections.
following in accordance with
and Division 1 SPecification
B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant
product required.
1,. certification by joint sealant manufacturer that
sea]antsplustheprimersandc}eanersrequiredforsealant installation comply with local regulations
controlfing use of volatile organic compounds '
c. Samples for initial- selection purposes in form of
manufacturer's standard bead samples, consj-sting of strips
of actual products showing fu1I range of colors available'
for each Product exPosed to view'
D. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color
of Joint seaLant reguired. lnstall joint sealant samples
in I/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-J-ong
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed
surfaces adjacent to joint sealants'
JOINT SEALANTS 01901 - 2
F.
G.
H.
A.
B.
A.
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants
attesting that their products comply with specification
requirements and are suitabl-e for the use indicated '
compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric
seafant manufacturer indicating that materj,al-s forming
joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been
Lested for compatibility and adhesion with joint seafants.
lncfude sealant manufacturerr s interpretation of test
results rel-ative TA seafant performance and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed to obtain adhesion.
product test reports for each type of joint sealants
indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements
speci fied.
preconstructlon field test reports indicating which
products and joint preparation methods demonstrate
acceptable adhesion to joint substrates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
rnstal-Ler Qualifications: Engage an experi-enced Installer
who has completed joint seal-ant applications similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project
that have resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-servi-ce performance.
si_ng]e source Responsibility for Joint sealant Materj-als:
Obiain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer
for each different product required.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened
containers or bundles wj-th label-s indicating manufacturer,
product name and desLgnation, co1or, expiration period for
L"", pot Life, curinq time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handLe materials in compliance with
manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low
temperaturesr contaminants, or other causes'
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditlons: Do not proceed with
installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1.6
7.'7
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 3
PART
2.t
A.
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
c.
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outsi-de the limits permi-tted by j oint sealant
manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation
of ioint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed
by joint seaLant manufacturer for application indicated.
Joi-nt Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with
instalfation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL
Cornpatibility: Provide joint seafants, joint fiLlers, and
other related materiaLs that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply
with the following:
1. Provide selections made
manufacturer's fulL range
products of tYPe indicated.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
Elastomeric Sealant Standard:
standard chemicalLy curing elastomeric seafants that
comply li'ith ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on
each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this
Section, including those requirements referencing
ASTM C 920 cl-assifications for Type, Grade, C1ass, and
Uses.
1. AdditionaL Movement Capability:Where additionaf
movement capability is specified in ELasLomeric Jolnt
Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the
capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion
under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C ?L9' to
withstand the specified percentage change in the joint
width exlsting at tine of installation and remain in
compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for
Uses indicated.
Provide manufacturer's t
by Architect from
of standard colors for
z-z
A
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 4
h
B.
R
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
2.4
Available Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, elastomeric sealants that may be
incorporated in the lrlork include, but are not limited to,
the products specified in each El-astomeric Seal-ant Data
Sheet.
SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JO]NT SEALANTS
Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard,
sol-vent-release-curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant
complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealj-ng
joints 3/16 inch or small-er in width.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, solvent-release-curing joint seafants that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not
limited to, the fol-l-owj-ng:
1.Pigmented Narrow Joint Seal-ant:
a. "PTI 200r" Protective Treatments, Inc.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part,
nonsag, mildew-resj-stant, paintable latex seafant of
formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed
appli-cations on interior Locations and that accommodates
indj-cated percentage change in joint width existing at
time of installation without failing either adhesively or
cohesively.
Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complylng with
ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not more
than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a
total of 10 percent.
Availab1e Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, fatex joint sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Acrvlic-Emuf sion Sealant :
"AC-20," Pecora Corp,
"Sonolac, t' Sonneborn
ChemRex, Inc.
"Tremco Acrylic Latex
Building Products Div. '
834r" Tremco, Inc.
2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type
that are nonstaining; are compatible wi-th joint
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 5
substrates, seafants, primers and other joint filfers; and
are approved for appllcations indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory
LEJ LITT\.,| .
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers:Preformed, compressible'
resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of
flexible plastic foam of material indicated befow and of
size, shape, and density to control- sealant depth and
otherwj-se contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
1. Cfosed-ceJ-I potyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid
water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic
tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing
sellant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
adhesion would result in sealant failure-
setf-adhesive tape where applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Provide
2.6
PART
?1
A.
A. Primer:Material recommended by joint sealant
manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from
preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field
tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces:Chemical cleaners
acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant
backing material-s, free of oily residues or other
substances capable of staining or harrning in any way joint
substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formul.ated
to promote optimum adhesion of seafants with joint
substrates.
Masking Tape: Nonstainj-ng, nonabsorbent material
compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to
j oints .
3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configuration, instalfation tolerances, and other
Londi_tj_ons affecting joint sealant performance- Do not
proceed with installation of joint seaLants until
unsatisfactory condi-tions have been corrected.
.JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 6
A.
B.
|-
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
3.2 PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning of Joints:
before installing j oint
recommendations of j oint
following requlrements :
Clean out joints immediatelY
seal,ants to comPIY with
seal-ant manufacturer and the
1. Remove all- foreign materiaf from ioint substrates that
coul-d i-nterfere with adhesion of joint sealant,
i-ncluding dust, paints (except for permanent,
protective coatings tested and approved for seafant
adhesion and compatibility by seal-ant manufacturer),
o1d joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofinq, water
repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic
tiLe, and simil-ar porous joint substrate surfaces by
brushj-ng, grindi-ng, blast cleanj-ng, mechanical
abrading, or a combinatj-on of these methods to produce
a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum
bond with joint seal-ants. Remove loose partlcles
remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming
or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove faitance and form release agents from concrete-
4. Clean metal, g1ass, porceJ-ain enamel, glazed surfaces
of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with
chemical cleaners or other means that do not staj-n'
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of
interfering with adhesion of ioint sealants.
Joint Primj-ng: Prime j oj-nt substrates where indicated or
where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on
preconstruction joi-nt seafant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant
manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas
of joint sealant bond; do not al-l-ow spillage or migration
onto adjoining surfaces.
Maskj-ng Tape: Use maskj-ng tape where required to prevent
contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise
wouLd be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after toollng without disturbing
joint seal.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
General-: Comply with joint seal-ant manufacturer's printed
j-nstallation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply.
B. SeaLant Installation Standard: Comply with
recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint seal-ants
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 7
3.4
3.5
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
T
I
I
1
1.
(.
D.
E.
A
as appl"icabLe to materials, applications, and condition" I
indicated.
Install-ation of Sealant Backings: Instal-l sealant
backlngs to comply with the following requirements:
Instatl joint fillers of type indicated to provide
support of sealants during application and at position
required to produce the cross-sectional- shapes and
depths of instaLled sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum seal-ant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint
fiflers.
c. Remove absorbent joint fill-ers that have become
wet prior to sealant application and replace with
drv material.
2. Instal-f bond breaker tape between sealants where
backer rods are not used between sealants and joint
fill-ers or back of joints.
lnstallation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven
techniques that result in seal-ants directly contacting and
ful1y wetting joint substrates' completely filling
recesses provided for each joint configuration, and
providing uniform, cross-sectional- shapes and depths
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability. InstalL sealants at the same time
seaLant backings are j-nstaLled.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Irnmediately after sealant
application and prior to time skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated' to eliminate air pockets. and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of
joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to
joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor seafants
or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by seafant
manufacturer.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in
ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
CLEANING
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent tojoi-nts as work progresses by methods and with cleaning
materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTlON
JOINT SEALANTS 0?901 - 8
A.I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
t
I
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from
contact with contaminating substances or from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so
that they are without deterioration or damage at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,
damage or deteriorati-on occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint seaLants immediately so that and
instal-Iations with repaired areas are indistinguishable
from oriqinal work.
REFER TO FOLLOWING DATA SHEETS ON JOINT SEALANTS
JOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 9
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET
ELastomeric Joint Sealant Locations: Exterior vertica] joints'
ffirames'windows,].ouversandotherprojections
through the wal-l-.
Base Pol-vmer: Urethane.
Type: M (multicomponent).
Grade: NS (nonsag) .
Class: 25.
Additional Moveme!! :lgg[!l:!Q: 50 percent movement in extension
for a total of 100.
UseIs] Related to Expesure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M. G, A, and, as applicable to
joint substrates indicated' O.
Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass. color anodized
d with a high-Performance coating,
galvanized steel, brick, and wood.
Products:
FecorE-oynatrol IL
Tremco Dymeric.
Vulkem 922.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
IJOINT SEALANTS 07901 - 10
I ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET
I El-astomeric Joint Seal-ant for Interior and Exterior Traffic
I 4rseE'Base Pol-ymer: Urethane.
I Type: M (multicomponent). S (single component).
I Grade: P (pourable).
r cl-ass z 25.
I Uselsl Related to Exposure: T (traffic).
Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G' A, and, as applicable toI
Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized
I aluminum, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating,t qalvanized steel, brick, and wood.
I ;#*i-zor.
Sonneborn Sonolastic SL1.
I
Vulkem 45 by Mameco International.
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
JorNr SEALANTS 07901 - 1l-
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET I
Elastomeric Jolnt Sealant for Wet Areas Sinks
and Similar Areas:
Plumbin Fixtures I
I
I
I
t
I
t
Base PoLymer: Neutral-curing
Type: S (single component).
Grade: NS (nonsag) .
sil-icone.
CLass : 25.
UseIs] Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic)
Uses Rel-ated to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable tojoint substrates indicated' O.
Use O ,Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized
aluminum, afurninum coated with a high-performance coating'
galvanized steeL, brick, and wood.
Products:
ootrlCorn:.ng ?90 or 795.
General Electric SCS 1702.
Pecora 898.
tremco Proglaze.
END OF SECTION 07901
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
T
t
IJOINT SEALANTS 07901 - r.2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
B.
(-
n
SECTION
PART 1
1.1
A.
1,.2
08111 - STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES
- GENERAI
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract' including
Generaf and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following products manufactured
in accordance with HMMA/NAAMM Recommended Standards:
1. Frames: Pressed steef frames for doors, transoms,
sidelights, mullions,interior glazed panels, and other
interior and exterior openlngs of following type:
a. Welded unit tvpe.
2. Provide factory ,r"r"n.O doors and frames.
Palnting prj-med doors and frames is specified in Division
9 Section "Painting."
Vriood doors are specified in another Divisj-on 8 Section.
Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section.
Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division I
Section.
Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry
construction is specified in Division 4.
SUBMITTALS
General-: Submit the following in accordance wlth
Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
Product data for each type of door and frame specified,
including detail-s of construction, materials, dimensions,
hardware preparation, core' label compliance, sound
ratings, profiles, and finishes.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of
standard steel doors and frames. Include detai]-s of each
frame type, eLevations of door design types' conditions at
openings, detail-s of construction, Iocation and
installation requirements of door and frame hardware and
reinforcements, and details of joints and connections.
Show anchoraqe and accessory items.
A.
1.3
A.
B.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1
L.4
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
z.
D.
A.
!1 .
B.
Provide schedule of doors and frames using same
reference numbers for details and openings as those on
contract drawi-ngs.
Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with
glass and glazing requirements.
Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies
required to be fire-rated and exceeding limitations of
labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification
that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to
conform to desi-gn, materials and construction equivalent
to reguirements for l-abeled constructlon.
OUALITY ASSURANCE
Provide doors and frames complying with HMMA/NAAMM "Guide
Specifications for Commercial HoIlow MetaLs Doors and
Frames" and as herein specified.
1.5 DELTVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to
provide protection during transit and job storage.
Provide addj-tional protection to prevent damage to finish
of factory-finished doors and frames.
Inspect doors and frarnes upon delivery for damage. Minor
damages may be repaired provided refinished items are
equal i-n all- respects to new work and acceptable to
Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as
directed.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover.
Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoj-d
use of non-vented plastic or canvas sheLters which coufd
create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door
becomes wet, remove carton inmediately.Provide
1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air
circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.I ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Avaitable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
reguirements, manufacturers offering standard steel doors
and frames which may be incorporated in the work include;
but are not limited to, the following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Gateway, Inc.
b. NCS Mfg. Co.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 2
A.
B.
D.
E.
F.
H.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
.l
e.
Southwestern Ho11ow Metal
Steefcraft Doors, Inc,
W. Ray Crabb or Equal
z-L
2.3
MATERIALS
Hot-Ro11ed Steel Sheets
carbon steef, pickled and
and ASTM A 568.
and Strip: Commercial qualitY
oiJ-ed, complyi-ng with ASTM A 569
CoId-Ro11ed Steel Sheets: Conmercial quality carbon
steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568-
Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel- sheets
of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, or
drawing quality, ASTM A 642, hot dipped galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 525, with A60 or G60 coating
designation, mi11 phosphatized.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not fess than 18-gage
sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames.
Inserts, BoIts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard
units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls'
hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C
or D as applicable.
Shop Applied Paint:Apply after fabri-cation.
1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either
air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified
finish paints complying with ANSI A224.l-, "Test
Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted
Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames."
FRAMES
Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights'
borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles
as shown on drawJ-ngs and schedules. Conceal- fastenings'
unless otherwise indi.cated. Fabricate frames of minimum
18-gage cold-rolled steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered, coped, or welded
ar/1rharq
2. Form exterior frames from 16-gage galvanized steel-.
Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drilL
stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of
single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door
frames.
Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gage steel pl-aster
guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08r-11 - 3
2.4
Unless otherwise
assemblies with U
tr \ nr hatforL.t
AND FRAMES
mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware
operation and to close of f j-nteri-or of openings.
FABRICATION
Fabricate steeL door and frame units to be rigid, neat in
appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle.
Wherever practicable, fit and assembfe units in
manufacturer's plant. CIearIy identify work that cannot
be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to
assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with
ANSI/SDI-100 requirements.
1.Internal- Construction:Manufacturer's standard
honeycomb, polyurethane, polystyrene, unitized steel
grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral
fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of
face sheets where approprj.ate in accordance with SDI
standards.
2. Cfearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads
except between non-fire-rated pairs of doors not more
than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including
stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled
stee1.
ToLerances: Comply with HMMA/NAAMM "Guide Specification
for HoIIow Metal Doors and Frames. "
Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement,
edge channels, louvers and moldings from either
cold-roLled or hot-rolIed steel.
Fabricate exterior doors, panels. and frames from
galvanized sheet steel in accordance with HMMA/NAAMM 851.
Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral
part of door construction or by addition of mj-nimum
16-gage inverted steel- channels.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide
countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and
boLts.
Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assembl-ies:At exterior
locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide
doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame
assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 or
ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assembLies.
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
D.
F.
indicated, provide thermal-ratedfactor of 0.41 Btu/(hr x sq ft x deg
STEEL DOORS 0811. L - 4
L.
H.
K.
L.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
PART
3.1
A
UnLess otherwise indicated, provide acoustical
assembl-ies with sound ratinqs of STC 33 or better.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive
mortised and concea.Ied hardware in accordance with final
Door Hardware Schedul-e and templ-ates provided by hardware
supplier.Comply with applicable requirements of
ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
For concealed overhead door cl-osers, provide spacef
cutouts, reinforcing and provisions for fastening in
top raiJ- of doors or head of frames, as applicabfe.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied
hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied
hardware may be done at project site.
J. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if
not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations
for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel- Doors and
Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute.
Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces
of steel door and frame units, including galvani-zed
surfaces.
Clean steel surfaces of mi-l1 scale, rust, oil, glrease,
dirt, and other foreign materials before application
of paint.
Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency toprovide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive
finish paint.
Glazing Stops:
aluminum.
Minimum 20 gage steel or .O4O-inch-thick
Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior
doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass.
Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on
inside of q1ass.
3 - EXECUIION
INSTALLATION
General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and
accessories in accordance with final shop drawings,
manufacturerrs data, and as herein specified.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of HMMA 840
"Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames, " unless otherwise indicated.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES uu l-l- r - 3
3.2
Except for frames located at existing concrete,
masonry or drywall install-ations, place frames prior
to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set
frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and
braced securely until permanent anchors are set.
After wall- construction is completed' remove temporary
braces and spreaders Ieaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
1n masonry construction, locate 3 wall- anchors per
jamb adjacent to hlnge location on hinge jamb and at
corresponding heights on strike jamlc. Acceptable
anchors incl"ude masonry wire anchors and masonry Tee
anchors.
Install- fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA
Standard No. 80.
In rnetal stud partitions, install at least 3 waII
anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In
closed steel stud partitions, attach waLl- anchors to
studs with screws.
Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in
frames, wj-thin cfearances specified in HMMA/NAAMM 861.
1. Instalf fire-rated doors with cLearances as specified Iin NFPA Standard No. 80. t
ADJUST AND CIEAN
Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand
smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply
touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final
inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from
prefinished doors.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware
items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in
complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08111
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
z-
?
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES UdIIl. - O
I
I
I
t
T
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
PART 1
L.1
A.
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.2
- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY:
Extent and Location of each type of flush wood door is
indicated on drawings and in schedules.
Types of doors reguired incfude the fo]Lowing:
Shop-priming of flush wood doors j.s included in this
section.
Factory-finishing of flush wood doors is included in this
section.
Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for
hardware for wood doors is included in this section.
Wood door frames and other woodwork in juxtaposition to
flush wood doors are specified in Division-6 section
"Architectural Woodwork" .
MetaL door frames for flush wood doors are specified in
another Division-8 section.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each
type of door, including detaifs of core and edge
construction, trj.m for openings and louvers, and
factory-f inishing specif ications .
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location
and size of each door, el-evation of each kind of door,
details of construction, location and extent of hardware
blocking, fire ratings, requirements for factory finishing
and other pertinent data.
1. For factory-premachined doors, indicate dimensions and
l-ocations of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts
adjacent to light and louver openlngs.
Samples: Submi-t samples, 1-0" square or as indicated' for
the fol-lowing:
1,. 3
A.
(-
D.
A.
R
FLUSH WOOD DOORS U6ZLL - !
1A
t_. 5
Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with soLid
wood edging representing typical range of color and
grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber
required.
Wood frames for liqht oPenings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for
Wood FLush Doors", of National Wood Window and Door
Association (NWWDA) '2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural
Ffush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute
(AWI) for grade of door, core construction, finish and
other requirements exceeding those of NWIIIDA guality
standard.
NWWMA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA
Wood Flush 'Door Certification Hallmark certifying
compliance with applj-cable requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1
Series.
For manufacturers not participating in NWWDA Hal-lmark
Program, a certification of compliance may be
substituted for marking of individual doors.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are
identical in materiafs and construction to units tested in
door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are
labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, warnock
Hersey or other testing and inspection agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.Manufacturer:Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
PRODUCT DELIVERYI STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Protect doors during transit' storage and handling to
prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Conply with
ieguirements of referenced standards and recommendations
of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish' lnstall,
and Maintain Wood Doors", as welL as with manufacturerrs
i-nstructions.
Identify each door with individual opening numbers which
correlate with designation system used on shop drawings
for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary' removable
or concealed markings.
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.
1.
A
B.
I
A.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS udzLL - z
A.
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
I
I
t
1.6
l.'7
PART
2.).
A.
PROJECT COND]TIONS:
Conditioni-ng: Do not defiver or instalf doors until
conditions for temperature and refative humidity have been
stabilized and wltl be maintained in storaqe and
installation areas during remalnder of construction period
to comply with the following requirements applicable to
project's geographical location:
1. Referenced AWI
L00-S-3 "Moisture
WARRANTY:
General: Warranties
limj-tation of, other
Contract Documents.
quality standard including Section
Content".
shal-l- be ln addition to, and not a
rights the Owner maY have under the
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in
door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer'
lnstaller and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace
defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or
that show telegraphing of core constructj-on in face
veneers, or do not conform to tolerance l-imi-tations of
referenced quality standards.
1. Warranty sha11 also incl-ude reinstallation whi-ch may
be required due to repair or replacement of defective
doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging-
2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of
time after date of Substantial Completion.
3. Solid Core Interior Doors:
4,.Li-fe of installation.
Contractorrs Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors
where Contractor's work contri-buted to rejection or to
voiding of manufacturer's warranty.
2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers:Subj ect
requirements, manufacturers offerlng
incorporated in the work include, but
the f ol-Lowing:
1. Sol-id core Doors as indicated on
a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
b. Buell Door Company.
c. Chappell Door ComPanY.
d. Doors, Incorporated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
to compliance with
doors which may be
are not limited to,
Interior drawings
08211 - 3
z.z
PART
3.1
A.
3.2
3-
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
ofL.
A.
B.
A.
B.
e. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division'
f. Gay Doors, Inc.
S. Glen-Mar Door Mfg. Co.
h. Graham Manufacturing CorP.
i. Ipik Door Co., Inc.
j. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
k. Weyerhauser ComPanY-
FABRICATION:
Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening
sizes i.t-dicated with the following uniform clearances and
bevels:
L. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for
pretitting. Conply with final hardware schedules and
door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates.
2. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal
frames to verify dimensions and alignment before
proceeding with factory prenachining.
Openings: Cut and trim openj-ngs through doors to comply
"itn applicable requirements of referenced standards for
kind(s) of doors required.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings
material and Profile indicated.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION:
Examine installed door frames prior
1. Verify that frames comPlY with
for tyPe, srze, location, and
and have been installed with
heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
to hanging door:
indicated reguirements
swing characteristics
plumb jambs and level
Do not proceed with instalfation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION:
Hardware: For installation see Division-8 "Finish
Hardware" section of these specifications.
Manufacturerrs lnstructions: Install wood doors to conply
with manufacturerts instructions and of referenced AwI
standard and as indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
C. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform cfearance at each
edge.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION:
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or
operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during
installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to
ensure that wood doors will be without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 082]-1
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
PART 1
1.1
A
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS
1a
- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General" and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to thls Section.
SUMMARY
This Section incl-udes the following types of al-uminum
entrance and storefront work:
1. Storefront-type framing system.
A.
B.Rel-ated Sections: The foJ-lowing sections contain
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Automati-c entrance doors are included in Divlsion 8
Section "Automatic Entrance Doors."
2. Glazj-ng requirements for aluminum storefront are
incl-uded in Dj-visj.on 8 Section "Glass and Glazing."
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General-:Provide aluminum storefront assemblies that
comply with performance characteristics specifiedr 3s
demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding
stock assemblies according to test methods indicated.
Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum storefront framing
systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the
component materials.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metaL
surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C)
without buckling, fail-ure of joint seals, undue stress
on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners,
reduction of performance, stress on g1ass, or other
detrimental effects.
Design Requirements: Provide aluminum storefront systems
that comply with structural performance, air infiltration,
and water penetration requirements indicated.
1. Wind l,oads: Provide al-umi-num storef ront assembl-ies
capable of withstanding wind pressures of 30 psf
inward and 30 psf outward acting normal to the plane
of the wall-.
B.
e
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 1
1A
Aj-r Infil-tration: Provide aluminum storefront framing
system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06
CFM per sg. ft. of fixed area when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of
1 . 57 psf.
V{ater Penetration: Provide framing systems with no
uncontrolled water penetration as defined in the test
method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an
inward test pressure differentiaL of 5.24 Lbf per sq. ft.
F.Condensation Resi.stance:Where framinq svstems are
"thermaL-break" construction, provide units tested for
thermaf performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showlng
condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not ]ess than 45.
Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have
an overall U-val-ue of not rnore than 0. 65 BTU/ (hr. x sq.
ft. x deg. F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested
in accordance with AAMA 1503.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following in accordance with
Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
1 Product data for each aluminum storefront system
required, including:
Manufacturer's standard detaifs, custom detaiLs
and fabrication methods.
b. Data on finishing, and accessorj-es.
c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleanlng of
exterior surfaces.
Shop drawi.ngs for each aluminum storefront system
required, including:
a. Layout and instal-lation details' includinq
rel-ationship to adjacent work.
b. ELevations.
c. Detail sections of tlpical composite members.
d. Anchors and reinforcement.
e. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
f . Glazing detail-s.
SampJ-es for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of
samples of each specified color and finish on
12-inch-1ong sections of extrusions or formed shapes.
Where normal color variations are anticipated'
incfude 2 ox more units in each set of samples
indicating extreme limits of color variations.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.
D.
A.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 2
1.
A.
a
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
Coordinate finishes
manufacturers used.
to match i f mr r l i i n l a
The Architect
1.5
J_.O
L. I
Samples for Verlfication Purposes:
reserves the right to requi-re additional samples, that
show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and
desiqn of hardware and accessori-es.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
InstaLl-er Qual-if lcations: Engage an experienced Instal-l"er
who has compteted installations of al-uminum storefront
simil-ar in design and extent to those required for the
project and whose work has resufted in construction with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications:Provide afuminum
storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in
manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated
for this project and that have a record of successful
in-service performance.
Sj-ngle Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum storefront
systems from one source and from a single manufacturer, if
possible. MuJ-tip1e sources to be preapproved by
Architect.
Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile,
and dimensional requirements of aluminum storefront work
required and are based on the specific types and models
indicated. Alumj-num storefront by other manufacturers may
be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and
profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as
judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality
is on the proposer. The drawings are based on Kawneer
NuCore series system storefront.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openi-ngs by accurate field
measuremenE before fabrication. Show recorded
measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabricati-on
schedule wi-th construction progress to avoid delay of the
work.
Where necessary, proceed with fabrlcation without
field measurements, and coordinate fabrication
tol-erances to ensure proPer flt.
WARRANTY
Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the
manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 3
I
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
B.
?
A.
B.
D.
fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Fail-ures incLude, but are not
necessariJ-y limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection'
excessive leakage or air infiltration.
2. Faulty oPeration.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal- finishes and other
materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Period:
Completion.
3 vears after the date of Substantial
The warranty sha1l not deprive the Owner of other rights
or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of
the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs
concurrent with other warrantj-es made by the Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2 - PRODUCTSPART
.) 'l
z.z
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers:
requirements, manufacturers
that may be incorPorated in
l-imited to. the following:
Subject to compliance with
offering storefront sYstems
the work incl-ude, but are not
1. Amarlite Architectural Products '2. Kawneer CompanY' Inc.
3. PPG Industries.
4. TubeLite Division of Indal, Inc.
5. United States Aluminum CorP.
5. Vistawall Architectural Products.
MATERIALS
Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the
manufacturer for strength' corrosion resistance, and
application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 22I for
aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or
plate, and ASTM B 2!I for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members
shall comply with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates
and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or
ASTM A 570 for hot roll-ed sheet and strip.
GIass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of
"Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications.
Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic
stainless stee1, zlnc plated steel, or other material
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 0841.0 - 4
A.
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and
compatible with al-uminum components, hardware, anchors and
other components.
1. Reinforcement:Where fasteners screw-anchor into
aLuminum members Iess than 0.125 inches thick,
reinforce the interior with alumi-num or nonmagnetic
stainl-ess steel to receive screw threads, or provide
standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts.
E. Concealed Fl-ashinq:0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum
F.
dead-soft stainLess steel-, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum
extruded aluminum of a11oy and type selected by
manufacturer for compatibillty with other components.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength
aluminum brackets and rei-nforcements; where use of
alumj-num is not feasibl"e provide nonmagnetic stainless
steel- or hot-dip galvanized steel- complying with
ASTM A 123.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron,
malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized steef j-nserts
complying with ASTM A l-23.
COMPONENTS
Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and
entrance framing systems fabricated from extruded al-uminum
members of size and profife indicated. Include subframes
and other reinforcing members of the type indicated.
Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame comPonents where
possible. Provide storefront frame sections without
exposed seams.
1. MuIIion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside
glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric Alazing.Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make
provi-si-ons to drain moisture accumulation to the
exterlor.
FABRICATION
A. General:Fabricate aluminum storefront components to
designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply
with indicated standards. Sizes and profj-1e requirements
are indicated on the drawi-ngs. Variabfe dimensions are
indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required'
to achieve design requirements and coordination with other
work.
B. Prefabrication:finishing, and otherbefore shipment to
Complete fabrication,assembly,
work to the greatest extent possible
Disassemble
08410 - 5
)a
z.q
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS
the Project site.
components only
instalLation.
as necessary ror shipment and
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting,
fittlng, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work
to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces.
C. Weldj-ng: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed
welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides'
Restore mechanical finish.
1.Welding behind finished surfaces shaff be performed in
such a manner as to minimize distortion and
discol-oration on the finished surface.
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware
and as necessary for performance requirements, sag
resistance and rigiditY.
Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimiLar metals with
bituminous paint, or a suitable sealant, or a
nonabsorptive pJ-astic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket
between the surfaces. Do not use coatings contai-ning
lead.
Continuity: Maintain accurate refation of planes and
angles with hairline fit of contacting nernbers.
1 IIn i f nrm i trr Of Metal FiniSh:I . rJrIr!\./J-rrrf u_), \Abutting extruded
aluminum members of windows and doors shall not have
an integral coLor or texture variation greater than
half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal-
Fasteners: Conceaf fasteners wherever possible.
2.5 FINISHES
A. General-: Compty with NAAMM "Metaf Finishes Manual" for
recommendations re]ative to application and designations
of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminun Association for designating
aluminum finishes.
Finish aluminum entrance and storefront to match other
adjacent glazed wj-ndow system comPonents.
D. Color to be Interstate Green, UC#51524
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
T
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
D.
F.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 6
1.
A.
A.
(-
D.
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5.2
??
3.4
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer
present, for compliance with requirements indj-cated'
installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect
instal-lation of al-umi-num entrances and storef ronts '
Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding wlth
the instal-l-ation.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for instaflati-on.
instructions and
Set units plumb, level, and true to li-ne, without warp or
rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Install
components in proper alignment and relation to estabLished
lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and
anchor securely in place.
Constructi-on Tolerances: Install aluminum storefront to
comply with the following tolerances:
L. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed I/8 lnch in 72
feet of length or t/4 inch in any total length.
2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true
alignment between tvto identical members abutting end
to end in fine shafl not exceed L/I6 inch-
3. Diagonal Measurements:The maximum di-fference in
diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1'/8 inch.
4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-p1ane offset of
framing at corners shall not exceed l/32 inch.
separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from
sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of
contact with other materi-als.
CLEANING
Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after
installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings'
Clean glass surfaces after j-nstaLlation, complying with
requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section
for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and
sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aLuminum
surfaces.
PROTECTION
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 084L0 - 7
Institute protective measures required throughout the
remainder of the construction period to ensure that
aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage
or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of
acceDtance.
END OF SECTION 08410
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 08410 - 8
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
SECTTON 08460 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
L-Z
- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and generaf provisions of Contract' including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Dj-vision 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following types of automatic
entrance doors:
PART 1
11
A
a
A.
B.
A.
l-. Biparting sliding, with fixed sj-delights.
Related Sections: The following Sections
requirements that relate to this Section:
contai-n
ELectrical connections are specified in Division 16.
DEFINlTIONS
Automatic entrance doors consist of the manufacturer's
assembLed automatic entrance door units including entrance
doors and frames, door operator controls, powered door
operators, and accessories.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies that
comply with performance characteristics specified as
demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding
stock assemblies according to test methods indicated.
Thermal Movement: Design the automatic entrance door
systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the
component materials, Doors shal-l functj-on normally over
the specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal
surface temperature range of 180 deg F (100 deg C)
without buckJ-ing, failure of joint sea1s, undue stress
on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners,
reduction of performance, stress on g1ass, or other
detrimental- effects.
Design Requirements: Provide automatic entrance door
systems that comply with performance requirements
indicated.
A.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 1
1q
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
D.
E.
B.
D.
E.
1. Wind Loads:Provide automatic entrance door
assemblies capable of withstandinq wind pressures of
20 psf inward and 20 psf outward acting normal to the
plane of the waLl.
Transmissi-on characteristics: Provide automatic entrance
doors with jamb and head frames that limit air leakage to
a rate no! Eo exceed 1,25 cfm per square foot of door area
when tested i_n accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward
pressure differential of 1.567 psf-
Operator: Provide operators that wiII open and close
d-oors and maintain them in fully closed position when
subjected to a 30-mph wind velocity or the equivalent
inward differential Pressure.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following i-n accordance wi'th
conditions of the contract and Division 1 specification
Sectlons.
product data for each automatic entrance required'
including the manufacturer's standard details, custom
detaifs and fabrication methods and the following:
1.
2.
4.
Data on operators, hardware, and accessories'
Roughing-in diagrams.
Parts Iists.
Data on fini-shes and recommendations for maintenance
and cleaning of exterior surfaces-
Shop drawings for each automatic entrance required'
i - z.l rrA i nrr..Lrrvr qsrrrY .
1. Layout and instal-lation details,including
relationshiP to adjacent work.
2. Elevations at 1/A-inch scale'
3. Detail sections of typical composite members'
4. Anchors and reinforcement.
5. Hardware mounting heights.
6. Provisions for expansion and contraction '
7. Glazing details.
8. Locking devices and remote entry-open button'
Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power operator,
signai, an-a control systems differentiating clearly
beiween manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed
wiring.
Hardware schedule: submit complete hardware schedule for
automatic entrance doors organized into sets based on
hardware specified. coordinate hardware with doors,
frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness'
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08450 - 2
G.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
1.6
1r-6.| f,rnn+i nn and f j.nish. Coordinate hardware forllctllL,l, .l- Lr r r \- L -L v r r ,automatic entrance doors with hardware required for the
rest of the Project. Incfude name of the item and the
manufacturer and complete designations of every item
required for each entrance.
Samples for Initial Color Sel-ection: Submit pairs of
samples of each specified color and finlsh on 12-inch-Iong
sections of extrusions or formed shapes. [rlhere normal-
color variations are anticipated, include two or more
units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of
cofor variations,
Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves
the right to require additional samples that show
fabrication techniques and workmanship and design of
hardware and accessorles.
Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and
servj.ce data for door operators and control system
including the name, address and telephone number of the
nearest authorized service representative.
QUALTTY ASSURANCE
A. Instal-l-er Qualif ications:For install-ation of the
automatic entrance doors, engage an experienced InstaIler
who is an authorized representative of the manufacturer
for both the installation and maintenance of the type of
units required for this Project.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide automatic entrance
doors produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing
systems that are similar to those indicated for this
Project and can provide custom mullion details, and that
have a record of successfuL in-service performance.
BHI{A Standard: Provide automatic entrance door units that
comply with applicabl-e reguirements of ANSI A156.10 (BHMA
1601-), Power Operated Pedestrian Door Standard.
UL Standard: Provide powered door operators that comply
wr-t'n ut Jz 5 .
Design Criteri-a: The drawings indicate the si-ze, profile
and dimensional requirements of automatic entrance doors
required and are based on the specific types and models
indicated.Automatic entrance doors bY other
manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in
dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the
design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of
proof of equality is on the proposer.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 3
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
1.
F.
A.
A.
B.
Emergency Exit Doors: Automatic entrance doors serving as
a required means of egress shall comply with requlrements
of authorities having j urisdiction.Provide
manufacturer's certification that doors comply with these
rarrrri roman t q
PROJECT CONDITIONSL.7
PART
2.1
A.
FieId Measurements: Check openings
measurement before fabrication.
by accurate field
Show recorded
measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedufe with construction progress to avoid delay of the
Work.
Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without
field measurements, and coordinate fabrication
tolerances to ensure proper fit.
WARRANTY
Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the
manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace components of
the automatic entrance door system that fail in material,s
or workmanship within the specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not necessarily limited to:
l-. Structural- failures including excessive deflection,
excessive leakage or air infiltration.
2. Faulty operation of operators and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes' and other
materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Peri-od:
t'- nrnzr] at i a\r.\
3 years after the date of Substantial
The warranty sha11 not deprive the Owner of other rj-ghts
or remedies that the Owner may have under other provislons
of the Contract Documents and is in additi-on to, and runs
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor
under reguirements of the Contract Documents.
2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compJ-iance with
requirements, manufacturers offering automatic entrance
doors which may be incorporated in the Work include' but
are not l-imited to, the following:
1. Besam Power-Glide.
2. Stanley Dura Gfide.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 4
A.
B.
a
A
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
z-z
2.3
MATERIALS
Aluminum Members: Al1oy and temper recommended by the
manufact.urer for strength, corrosion resistance, and
:nnlir-:tinn nf rerrrli red finieh f-nmnlrr r^ri th ASTM B 22L' vvrrrlJ r ifor al-uminum extrusi-ons; ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or
plate; and ASTM B 211 for alumj-num bars, rods, and wire.
3. Provide main extrusions of not less than 0.125-inch
waLl- thickness.
Provide extruded glazing stops and other applied trim
extrusions with minimum waI1 thickness of 0.062 inch.
Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainl-ess steel-,
or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with
aLuminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items
belnq fastened.
Reinforcement:Where fasteners screw-anchor into
al-uminum members fess than 0.125 j-nch thick, reinforce
the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless
steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard
noncorrosive pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
Exposed Fasteners:Do not use exposed fasteners
except for application of hardware. For application
of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws
that match the finish of member or hardware beinq
fastened.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength
aLuminum brackets and reinforcements. Where use of
afuminum is not feasible, provide nonmagnetic stainl-ess
steel- or hot-dip galvanized steef complying with
ASTM A 123.
D. Sealants and Gaskets:Use sealants and gaskets in
fabrication, assembly and installation of the work that
are recommended and guaranteed by manufacturer to remain
permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating.
Glass and Glazing MateriaLs: Comply with requirements of
Division I Sectj.on "Glass and Glazing" of these
specifications for gaskets and sealants required for glass
installation at the project site.
HARDWARE
Provide heavy duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled
or required for operation of each entrance door, includi-ng
the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended
by the manufacturer for the servj-ce required. Fini-sh
hardware items to match finish of the door.
B.Automatic Locking: Provide an electrically controll-ed
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 5
devi-ce to automatically lock the vestibule door in the
closed position after each cycle. Include vertj-cal rod
complying with UL 305. The j-nterior set of sliding doors
shall be lockabl-e after hours, with the conceafed' tamper-
nrnnf rzert i r:al rod devices ,The exi-t dev.ice shal l
nrnhi l-r'i t menral breakout of the doors from the exterioryr vrrf v4
side. To maintai-n emergency egress from this set of
doors, integral panic egress paddles shalL be installed on
the interior side of the doors, to activate the
"breakaway" function.In addition, a faiL safe-type
eLectronic solenoid box shall be mounted in the interior
header case and shall be capable of the following flexible
traffic ffow controls:
Automatic Function:
a. The j-nterior and exter j-or approach sensors t
when activated, sha11 signal the door to slide
open, time out, sl-ide cl-osed.
b. The lock shaLl be continuously disengaged.
c. The door can also be opened from the console
by depressing an "open door" switch.
d. If the door is broken out, an aLert light and
alarm shall be energized and the door operator
shall be disabled.
One Way Function:
a. The exterior approach sensor shall- not
actlvate the door. OnIy the interior approach
sensor shafl- signal the door to oPen.
b. The Lock shall be engaged when the door is
cLosed.
c. The door can be opened from the consofe by
depressing an "open door" switch.
d. If the door is broken out, an al-ert light and
alarm shal-I be energized and the door oPerator
shall be disabled.
e. Although the exterior sensor wj-1l not open the
door, it shall- function as a "door beIJ-" upon
detection of a person, by energizing an al-ert
liqht and alarm.
f. If the door does not
liqht and al-arm shaLf
Manual Function:
Neither the interior nor the exterior approach
sensors shall signal the door to open.
The fock shalI be engaged when the door is
closed.
The door can be opened only by depressing an
"open door" switch on the console or a remote
switch.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
a.
1-\
1.
)
cl-ose and lock, an alert
be enerqized.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 6
b.
I
t
T
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
d. If the door is broken out, an alert light and
aLarm sha11 be energlzed and the door operator
di sabLed.
e. Although the exterior sensor wil-l- not open the
door, it shall function as a "door bell" upon
detection of a person, by energizing an afert
light and al-arm.
f. If the door does not close and 1ock, an alert
liqht and aLarm shall be energized-
A key switch l-ocated on the outerside of the inner
doors to al-l-ow entry by keyed override of system
with the following equipment or equal:
a.'1 04 security door control key switch SPDT
momentary make of circuite.
b. Sergeant Mortise Cylinder. ' eyeed to existing
system (biting information to be provided) .
c. 3/4" push button swi-tch.
d. Time delay isolator.
5. Capability of Connection to Optional Timer:
a. An external timer (supplied by others) can be
connected to the console to automatically
switch the mode of operation at specific times
each day.
b. The timer can be overridden at any time by
turning the mode of operation switch to any of
the other positions.
In addition, the following requirements shall be met by
the control box:
1.Remote Control Switch Connectlon:
a. Push and release the "open door" switch. The
door shal-], unLock (if locked), slide open,
close (when all zones are clear) and re-lock
(except in automatic mode).
Audible Siqnal:
"On" position - an alarm shall- sound whenever
the door is open or secure' except in the
automatic mode. In addition, the aLarm shafl
sound upon approach to the exterior sensor,
except in the automatic mode.t'Off' position - disables the audible alarm.
Consofe panel indicator lights required to signal:
a. Door closed and l-ocked.
b. Door in breakout Positlon.c. Alert - door broken out
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 7
- person approaching from exterlor
- door not closed and l-ocked
Automati-c mode.
One way mode.
Manual mode .
D.
E.
Exterior doors shall remain unlocked at all times.
Push Bars: Manufacturer' s standard surface-mounted
aluminum push bars in finish matching door frame.
Instafl hardware' except surface-mounted hardware, at the
fabrication plant. Remove only as required for final
fj-nishing operation, and delivery and instaffation at the
Project site.
DOOR OPERATORS
Capacity: Provide operators of the size recommended by
the manufacturer for door slze, weight, and movement; for
condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free
operation under normaL traffic load for the type of
occupancy indicated.
Exposed Housing: Provide extruded or formed alumi-num
housing for operators of 0.062-inch minimum thickness with
fasteners conceal-ed when door is in the cl-osed position.
Provide access for maintenance.
Adjustment Features: Operators shall be fully adjustable
wi-thout removal of the doors. Provj-de adjustment for
opening, closing, and checking speeds, as well as length
of time the door remains oPen.
Electro-Mechanical Operators for Slidi-ng Doors: Provide
sel-f-contained, concealed, overhead electro-mechanicaL
drive unit with power opening and either power or spring
closing, and checking for both opening and closing cycles.
Include connections for povter and control wiring.
Provide safety rel-ease clutch for obstructed closing.
Provj-de for easy manual stiding when power is off.
Provide operator action as indicated.
1. Provide emergency breakaway swing feature.
2. Provide conceal-ed overhead operators wi-th connections
for power and control wiring.
DOOR CONTROL SYSTEMS
Microwave Scanner Motion-Detecting Control System:
Provide a self-contained, motion-detecting control system
composed of a microwave scanner sensing devj-ce to activate
door operator and horizontal photo-cell beam across door
.l
f.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
2.4
z.J
B.
D.
A,
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - I
1.
B.
c.
A
I
I
t
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
z.b
z- t
opening to prevent door from cl,osing until door is clear
of traffic. Sensing device shaII be adjustable to provide
detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent to those
required for mats. Provlde housinq for sensing device
finished to match finish of doors and frames.
1. Instafl scanners on both i-nterior and exteri-or of each
automatic sliding entrance door.
El-ectrical Interfocks: Unl-ess units are equipped with
self-protecting devices or circui-ts, provide electrical
interlocks to prevent operation of the unit when operation
of the door is prevented by lock and latch or door bolts '
Sliding Door Opening Width Control- Switch: Provlde a
two-position switch which, in the normaf position' aIlows
sJ-iding doors to travel to full opening width and' in the
aLternate position, reduces the opening to a selected
partlal opening wi-dth.
ACCESSORIES
Si11 Configuration at Sliding Entrance Doors: Provide
sill members and bottom guide system of configuration
indicated.
Provide threshold across door opening and inverted
roll-er guide track system at interior of si-delights.
Provide threshold extensions, wa1l to wall' at
exterior of sideliqhts.
FABRICATION
General: Fabricate automatic entrance door system
components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and
to comply with indicated standards.
B. Prefabrication:Provide automatic entrance doors as
prefabricated packaged units complete with doors, frames,
sidelights, transoms where indicated, door operators and
related components, hardware, and accessories. Complete
fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications
and other work before shipment to Project site.
Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent
possible, in coordination with i-nstallatj-on and
hardware requirements.
Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware
items until time of installation at project site.
Perform fabrication operations, including cutting,
fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work
in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish
surraces.For hardware, perform these operations
prior to application of finishes.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 9
Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed
welds smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides.
Restore mechanical flnish.
1. Perform welding behind finished surfaces in such a
manner as to minimi-ze distortion and discoLoration on
the finished surface.
Reinforce the work as necessary for performance
requirements and for support to the structure. Separate
metaf surfaces at moving joints wi-th nonmetalLic
separators to prevent rrfreeze-up" of joints.
Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimil-ar metals with
bituminous paint, a suitable seaLant, nonabsorptive
plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the
surfaces. Do not use coatings containing J-ead.
Maintain continui-ty of line and accurate reLation of
planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support
at mechani-ca1 joints, with hairline fit of contacting
members.
G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possibLe.
Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provj-de compression
weatherstripping against fixed stops. For exterior doors
without fixed stops, provide sliding weatherstripping
retained in an adjustable strip mortised into the edge of
the door.
Aluminum Door, Sidelight and Transom Framing: Fabricate
tubular and channel frame assemblies in configuration
indj.cated with welded or mechanical joints in accordance
with manufacturer's standards.Provi.de concealed
fasteners. Reinforce internally with steel shapes as
indicated, or as necessary, to support the required foads.
1. Provide glazing systems for frames to receive lights
and for replacement of glass. Provide for nonremoval
removal of glass from the exterior.
Provi-de type and profile of glazing system
indicated to receive glazing material-s indicated.
Fabricate frame assemblies for exterior walls with
flashing and weeps to drain penetrating moisture to
the exterlor.Provide anchorage and alignment
brackets for concealed support of assembly from the
building structure. AIlow for thermal- expansion of
exterior units.
FINISHES
F.
I
I
t
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a.
z.
D.
E.
H.
I.
2.8
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 10
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for
recommendations relative to application and designations
of finishes.
Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Assoclation for deslgnating
aLumi-num f inishes.
Finish aluminum automatic entrance door system components
to match adjacent al-uminum storefront work.
1. Interstate Green UC #51524.
- EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Template,s and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and
other data to fabricators and installers of related work,
as necessary, for coordi-nation of the automatic entrance
door installation.
INSTALLATION
Comply with
recommendations.
manufacturer ' s specifications and
Set units plumb, level, and true to line wlthout warp or
rack of frames or doors. Anchor securely in p1ace.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from
sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of
contact with other materials.
Set sill members in a bed of seal-ant or with joint fillers
or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight
construction.Comply with requirements of Divj-sion 7
Sections for sealants, fillers, and gaskets, to be
installed during installation of doors and frames.
Install complete door operator system in accordance with
manufacturer's instructi-ons, including piping, controls,
and control wiring.
Set tracks, header assembl-ies, operating brackets, rails
and guides l-eve.l- and true to f ocation with adequate
anchorage for permanent support.
ADJUSTING
After repeated operation of completed instaLlation,
equivalent to 3 days use by normal- traffic (100 to 300
cycles), readjust door operators and controLs for optimum
operating condi-tion and safety and for a weathertight
closure. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and
other moving parts.
A.
B.
?
PART
3.1
A.
3.2
3.3
A.
B.
D.
E.
A.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460 - 11
3.4
?q
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
A.
CLEANING
Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after
installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, di-rt, and other substances. Exercise care to
avoid damage to coatings.
Comply with requirements containedSection "G1ass and Glazing" for
maintenance of g1ass.
in Division 8
cl-eaninq and
PROTECTION
Institute protective measures
remainder of the construction
automatic entrance doors will
deterioration, other than normaLof acceptance.
reguired throughout theperiod to ensure thatbe without damage or
weathering, at the tine
END OF SECIION 08460
AUTOI'{ATIC ENTR,ANCE DOORS 08460 - 12
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
T
I
I
t
I
SECT]ON 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART
1.1
A.
L.Z
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes items known commercially as finish
or door hardware that are requj-red for swing' sliding, and
folding doors, except special types of unique hardware
specified in the same sections as the doors and door
frames on which they are installed.
This Section includes the following:
1. Hj-nges.
2. Pivots.
3. Lock cylinders and keys.
4 . Lock and l-atch sets.
5. Bofts.
6. Exit devices.
7. Push/pull units.
8. Closers.
9. overhead holders.
L0. Mi.scel-faneous door control devices.
11. Door trim units.
12. Protection plates.
13. Weatherstrj-pping for exterior doors.
L4. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors.
15. ThreshoLds.
Rel-ated Sections: The following Sections contain
requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "standard Steel Doors and Frames"
for siLencers integral with hollow metal frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for factory
prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door
hardware.
3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and
Storefronts" for aluminum entrance door hardware,
except cylinders.
4. Division 8 Section "Power
autornatic door operators.
SUBMITTALS
Door Operators" for
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
a
D.
General: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
car.l. i ^n e
following in
and Dlvision
accordance with
l- Specification
r.4
Product data includj-ng manufacturers' technical product
data for each item of door hardware, installation
instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish,
and other information necessary to show compliance with
reguirements.
Final- hardware schedufe coordinated with doors, frames,
and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
functj-on, and finish of door hardware.
l-.Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware
indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets"
indicating complete designations of every item
required for each door or opening. Include the
following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each
hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c, Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced toj-ndications on Drawings both on floor plans and in
door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and
codes contained in scheduLe.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
Submittal- Sequence: Submit final scheduLe at earliest
possible date particularly where acceptance of
hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other
work that is critical in the Project construction
schedule. Include with schedule the product data,
samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door
hardware. and other information essential to the
coordinated review of schedule.
Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule
indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions
on keying of locks has been fulfilfed.
Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to
be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware.
Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing
door hard!'rare to comply with indicated requirernents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
DOOR HARD}IARE 08710 - 2
B.
A.
l-(
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of
hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc. ) from
a si-ngle manufacturer.
Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door
hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the
Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful
in-servi-ce performance for suppJ-ying door hardware similar
in quantity, type, and quality to that indlcated for this
Project and that employs an experienced architectural
hardware consultang (AHC) who is availabl-e to Owner,
Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the
course of the Work, for consultation.
1.5
l|,r
PART
z.r
A.
1. Require supplier to meet with
requirements and to obtain
writing.
PRODUCT HANDLING
Inventory door hardware jointlY
hardware supplier and hardware
satisfied that count i-s correct.
Owner to finalize keYing
final lnstructions in
with representatj-ves of
installer until each is
Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the
Project, but not yet installed' Control handJ-ing and
instal-l-ation of hardware items that are not immediately
repJ-aceable so that completion of the Work will not be
delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Tools and Instructi-ons: Furnish a compLete
set of speclalized tools and maintenance instructlons as
needed for Ownerts continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal- and replacement of door hardware.
2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers:Subj ect
requirements, manufacturers offering
incorporated in the Work incLude' but
the fol-fowing:
Butts and Hinges:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
c. McKinney Products Co.
d. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
to compliance with
products that may be
are not limited to,
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3
2. Pivots:
a. Glynn-Johnson Corp.
b. LCN, Div. Ingersol)--Rand Door Hardware Group.
c. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.
3. Key Control System:
a. Key Control Systemsr Inc.
b. Telkee Inc.
4. Cyllnders, Locksets and Latch Sets:
a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.
b. Best Lock Corp.
c. Corbi-n & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div.
Black & Decker Corp.
d. Falcon Lock Co.
e. Sargent Manufacturi-ng Company.
f. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware
GrouP.
g. Yale Security Inc.
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
t
5. Bol-ts :
a. Builders Brass Works Corp.
b, Glynn-.Iohnson Corp.
c. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
d. Qual-ity Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc. t Div. Newman
Tonks, Inc.
e. Trimco
5. Exit,/Panic Devices:
a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div.
BLack & Decker CorP.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Cornpany.
c. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware
Group.
'1 . Push/Pull Units:
a. Bafdwin Hardware CorP.
b. Brookl-ine Industries, Di.v. YaLe Security Inc.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
d. Hiawatha, Inc.
e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow ComPanY.
f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).
8. Overhead Closers:
a. Corbin & Russwin Archi.tecturaL
Black & Decker Corp.
Hardware, Div.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
b. Dorma Door Controls International.
c. LCN, Div. IngersoJ-1-Rand Door Hardware Group.
d. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yal-e Security Inc.
e. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc,
f. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
S. Yale Security Inc.
9. Door Control Devices:
a. Glynn-Johnson Corp.
b. Rixson Firemark
t u . uoor '.t r]-m unrEs :
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
c. BulLders Brass Works Corp.
d. Hager Hinge Co.
e. H. B. Ives. A Harrow Company.
f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco) .
1L. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates:
a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.
b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yal-e Security Inc.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
d. Hiawatha, Inc.
e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
t. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco) .
S. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Company.
12. Door Stripping and Seals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Prbducts, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Sealeze Corp.
f. Ultra lndustries.
S. Zero International-, Inc.
13. Thresholds:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. NationaL Guard Products, Inc.
c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
e. Sealeze Corp.
f. Zero International, Inc.
14. Sound Stripping:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. Pemko Manufacturj-ng Co., Inc.t
I
DooR HARDWARE u6 /l-u - J
z.z
2.3
z..t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
A.
B.
r-
c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
d. Zero International, Inc.
SCHEDULED HARDWARE
Requirements for design, grade' function, finish, size,
and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish
hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the
end of this Section. Products are identifled by uslng
hardware designation numbers of the folJ-owing:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations:The product
designation and name of one manufacturer are listed
for each hardware type required for the purpose of
establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the
product designated orr where more than one
manufacturer is specified under the Articfe
"Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the
comparable product of one of the other manufacturers
that complies with requj-rements.
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
Base Metafs: Produce hardware units of basic metal and
forming nethod indicated, using manufacturer's standard
metal alloy, compositj-on, temper' and hardness' but i'n no
case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than
specified for applicable hardware units by applicable
ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware
item and with ANSI/BHMA A155.18 for finish designations
indicated, Do not furnish "optional" materj-als or forming
methods for those indicated, except as otherwise
specified.
Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to
published templates, generally prepared for machine screw
instal-1ation.Do not provide hardware that has been
prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as
specif ically i.ndicated.
Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item.
Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise
indicated. Finj-sh exposed (exposed under any condition)
screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces
of other work, to match finish of this other work as
closely as possible including "prepared for paint"
surfaces to recei-ve painted finish.
HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
Tempfates: Except for hinges and pivots to be insta]1ed
entirely (both l-eaves) into wood doors and frames, provide
only template-Produced units.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
T
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with
the fol-lowing requirements:
1. For metal- doors and f rames instal-l machi-ne screws into
drill-ed and tapped holes.
2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
3. Fi-nish screw heads to match surface of hinges or
pivots.
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge
pins as fol-lows:
2.5
1. Out.-Swi-ng Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
2. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
3. Tips: Fl-at button and matching Plug, flnished to
match leaves.
Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but
not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches
or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30
inches of additlonaL heiqht.
LOCK CYI,INDERS AND KEYING
Standard System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide
new masterkey system for Project.
MetaLs: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or
bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and,
except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change
key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike
with a group of related 1ocks.
1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of }ock that
identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and
notati-on, "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each 1ock, 5
master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys
for each grandmaster system.
l-. Deliver kevs to owner.
2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box
strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set,
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
A.
B.
D.
E.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
A.
A
A
B.
Provide dust-proof strikes
where special threshol-d
nonrecessed strike for bo1t.
for foot bolts, except
construction provides
Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of l-atch on
palrs of doors. Comply wj.th UL requirements for throw of
bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
Provide \/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other
bored and preassembled types of l-ocks and 3/4-inch
minimum throw of Iatch for mortise l-ocks. Provide
1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts.
Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of l-l2-inch-diameter rods of
brass, bronze, or stainless steel- with minimum
12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide
longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0' in
hei-ght.
PUSH/PULL UN]TS
Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer' s standard
exposed fasteners for installation, thru-bolted for
matched pairs but not for single units.
CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically
indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations
for size of door control unit depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.
1. Where paralle} arms are indicated for closers, provide
closer unit one sj-ze larger than recornmended for use
with standard arms.
Access-Free Manuaf Closers: Where manual closers are
indicated for doors required to be accessible to the
physically handicaPPed, provide adiustable units complying
with ANSI All?.1 provisions for door opening force and
delayed action closj-ng.
Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
DOOR TRIM UNITS
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed
fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine
screws or self-taPPing screws.
Fabricate protection plates not more than 2 inches less
than door width on hinge side and not more Ehan l/2 inch
less than door width on puII side by height indicated.
2.'7
2.8
2.9
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - I
18
?
D.
B.
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
2.t0
A.
2.Lt
A.
2.r2
A.
MetaI Pl-ates: Staj-nf ess steel, 0.050 j-nch (U. S
gage) .
WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
General: Provide contj-nuous weatherstripping on exterior
doors and smoke, l-ight, or sound seals on interior doors
where indicated or schedul-ed.Provide noncorrosive
fasteners for exterior applicati-ons and el-sewhere as
lndlcated.
Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where
resilient or fLexible seal- strlp is easily replaceable and
readily avai.Lable from stocks maintai-ned by manufacturer.
Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type
resifient insert and metaf retalner strips, surface
applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised, and of
following metal, finish, and resiLient bunper materiaL:
1. Solid neoprene conforming to MIL R 6855, Class II ,
Grade 40.
d,.Flexj-ble, ho11ow bufb or loop insert.
2. Flexibfe vi-nyl hol-low bul-b or loop insert.
3. Brush pile insert of polypropylene or nylon woven pile
and aluminum stri-p backing cornplying with AAMA '701 -2-
Weatherstripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold
consj-sting of contact-type resilient insert and metal
housing of design and size shown and of followinq metal,
finish, and resilient seal strip:
1. Extruded alumj-num with natural anodized finish'
0.062-inch minimum thickness of mai-n walls and
flanges.
THRESHOLDS
General-: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard
metaL threshold unit of tyPe, size, and profile as shown
or scheduled.
HARDWARE FINISHES
Match i-tems to the manufacturer's standard co]or and
texture finish for the l-atch and l-ock sets (or push-pull
units if no latch or lock sets) .
Provide quality of finish, incLuding thickness of plating
or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other
qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9
I
I
I
l
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
?
D.
no case l-ess than specified by referenced standards for
the applicabfe units of hardware.
Provide protective lacquer coating on aII exposed hardware
finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as
otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with
standard finish designations to indicate "no Iacquer."
D.The designations used in
indicate hardware finishes
standard commercial finishes,
3 - EXECUTION
Set thresholds for exterior
butyl-rubber or polYisobutYlene
with requirements sPecified in
Sealers. tt
scheduLes and elsewhere to
are the industry-recognized
except as otherwise noted.
doors in full bed of
mastic sealant complying
Division 7 Section "Joint
PART
3.1
A.
]NSTALLATION
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following
applicable publications, except as specifical-1y indicated
or required to comply vrith governing regulations and
except as otherwise directed by Archj-tect.
1. "Recommended Locations for Buil"ders Hardware for
Standard Steef Doors and Frames" by the Door and
Hardware Insti-tute.
2. NWWDA lndustry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locatj-ons
for Wood Fl-ush Doors. "
InstaLl each hardware item in compliance wj-th the
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where
cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto
or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished
in another wiy, coordinate removal, storage' and
reinstallation or application of surface protection with
finishing work specified in the Divisj-on 9 Sections. Do
not install surface-rnounted items untiL finishes have been
completed on the substrates involved.
Set units leve1. plumb, and true to line and location.
Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
for proper j-nstallatj-on and operation.
Dril-l and countersink units that are not factory prepared
for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in
accordance with industry standards.
F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations to the extent
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 10
1.
1
A.
B.
A.
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
5.2
3.3
ADJUSTTNG, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each
door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit.
Replace units that cannot be adlusted to operate freely
and smoothly or as intended for the application made,
Where door hardware is i-nstalled more than one month
prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area,
return to the instalLation during the week prior to
acceptance or occupancy and make final check and
adjustment of all hardware items in such space or
area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore
proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
Cfean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware i-nstallation.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with
requirements of Section "Door Hardware, " hardware set
numbers indicated in door schedufe, and i-n the following
scheduLe of hardware sets.
Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer
and product designatJ-on, size, and finish or color, as
applicable.
END OF SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 11
Opening Quantity
DOOR HARD!{ARE SCHEDULE
Hardware Set # QuantiLy
01
01
03
03
06
05
05
02
03A
03A
l_00A
1008
103
109
110
111
LL2
113
LL4
115
1
1
1
1I
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
l_
1
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
IDOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 12
I DOOR HARDWARE SETS
t DooR oPENTNG 100A, 1008
t QTY MFG ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION
Ir 1 Sargent 41 x 101 x 90 3/L6 US26D Cylinder
I BaLance of hardware supplied by door manufacturer.
Locate on exterior side of Door 1008.
r DOoR oPENING 103
I OTY MFG ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTIONI
1.5 McKinney TA714 4.5 x 4 US25D Hinge
I 1 Sargent 28-65G04 KL 25D Lockset Store Room
r Function
1 Trimco l23l Floor StoP
I 3 Hager 307D Silencer
I 1 Commercial KEY 005 Master Key Locksets** Stamp "Do Not Duplicate"
r
DOOR OPENING 109
I QTY MFG ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION
I 1.5 McKinney TA714 4.5 x 4 Us26D Hinge
I 1 Sargent 28-65G04 KL 26D Lockset Store Room
t uncE ]-0n
r 1 Trirnco I23l Floor StoP
I 3 Hager 307D Silencerr 1 commercial KEY 005 Master Key Locksets
I 1 ;"r;:iT" "o"nrt'!#p1icate"
Deadbort-Sinsrer cvl-inder
I DOOR OPENING 110, 111
I QTY MFG ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION
I
1.5 McKinney TA714 4.5 x 4 US26D Hinge
I L sargent 28-65G04 KL 26D Lockset Store Room
I Function
1 Hager 236W US32D Wa]] StoP
I 3 Hager 307D Silencer
I 1 Commercial KEY 005 Master Key Locksets** Stamp "Do Not Duplicate"
I
I
DooR HARDWARE 08?10 - 13
?
z
z
o
DOOR OPENTNG 112, 1.1.5
QTY MFG ITEM NUMBER
TA714 4.5 x
28-65U15 KL
L23l
307 D
ITEM NUMBER
TA714 4.5 x
28-55U51 KL
EN 1231 O TB
236W US32D
307D
DESCRIPTION
Hinge
Passage Set
Floor Stop
Silencer
DESCRIPTION
Hinge
Passage Set
Closer
Wall Stop
Silencer
McKinney
Sargent
Trimco
Hager
McKinney
Sargent
Sargent
Hager
Hager
4 US26D
26D
4 US25D
26D
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
t
I
DOOR OPENING 113, ].].4
QTY MFG
z
2
2
6
DOOR HARDVIARE 08?10 - 1{
I
I
I
SECTION 088OO _ GLAZING
PART
1.1
A.
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
t 1-'2
-1 ..*
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditlons and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section incLudes glazing for the foLlowinq products'
including those specified in other Sections where glazing
requirements are specified by reference to thj-s Section:
L. Window units.
2. Vision lites.
3. Entrances and other doors.
4. Storefront construction.
Related Sections: The following sections
reoui-rements that refate to this Section.
containB.
A.
B.
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
1
a
4.
6.
Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork. "
Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
Division 8 Section "Aluminum Storefronts."
Division 8 Section "Automatic Entrance Doors. "
Di-vision I Section "Steel Doors and Frames"'
Divi-si-on 8 Section "Mirror Glass."
DEFINITlONS
Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm
that produces primary glass or fabricated 91ass as defined
in the referenced glazing standard.
Deterioration of Insul-ating Glass i Failure of the
hermeti-c seaL under normal use due to causes other than
glass breakage and improper practices for maintaj-ning, and
cleaning insulating gIass. Evidence of fail-ure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or fil-m on the
interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for
maintaining and cleaning glass do not comply with the
manufacturert s directions.
STSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General:Provide glazing systems that are produced'
fabricated, and installed to withstand normaf thermal
movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where
applicabfe), without failure including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following:defective
manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
GLAZING 08800 - 1
seaLants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;
deterioration of qlazing materi-a1s; and other defects in
constructi-on.
Glass Desi-gn: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are
for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by
analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions.
Provide glass l-ites for the various size openings in the
thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to
meet or exceed the fol-fowing criteria:
Minimum glass thickness, nomi-na)-1y,
exterior walls is 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) .
Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed
of annea]ed or heat-treated glass, are selected so the
worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the
f ol-lowinq:
8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not
over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind
action. Determine minimum thickness of monol-ithic
annealed glass according to ASTM E 1300. For
other than monolithic annealed gIass, determj-ne
thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method
of analysis including applying adjustment factors
to ASTM E 1300 based on type of glass.
Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting
on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base
engineering calcul-ation on materiaLsr actuaL surface
temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky
heat loss.
Temperature Change (Range) z t2O deg F (67 deg C) , Iambient; 180 deg F (L00 deg C), material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
General-: Submit the foll-owing according to Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material-
indicated.I
C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch-square
samples of each type of glass indicated and 12-inch-long Isamples of each color required (except black) for each I
type of sealant or gasket exposed to view.Install
seal-ant or gasket sample between two strips of material
representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
I
I
I
I
1 of fites in
1.5 I
T
A.
t
T
I08800 - 2
D.
E.
F.
I
I
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
Product certificates signed by glazing materials
manufacturers certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing
materiaLs bearing manufacturer's permanent l-abel-s
designating type and thickness of g1ass, provided
Labefs represent a quality control program of a
recognized certj-fication agency or inciependent testing
agency acceptable to authorities havj-ng iurisdiction.
Compatibi-Iity and adhesion test reports from seal-ant
manufacturer indicating that glazing material-s were tested
for compatibility and adhesion with gl-azing sealants.
Incfude seal-ant manufacturer's interpretation of test
results relative to sealant perlormance ^-lct I lLt
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulatj-ng
glass edge sealant indicating that glass edge seaLants
were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials
including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks'
and edoe blocks.
G. Product test reports for each type of glazi-ng sealant and
gasket indicated, evidenci-ng compliance with requirements
<ncr.i f i crl
H. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to
include in Operating and Maintenance ManuaL speclfied in
Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Publications:Comply
recommendatj-ons of glass product
organizations be1ow, except where
requirements are indicated. Refer to
for glazing terms not otherwise defined
in referenced standards.
with publi-shed
manufacturers and
more stringent
these publications
in this Section or
1. FG['4A Publications: "FGMA Glazi-ng Manual. "
I 2. LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide."I 3. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical- Glazing
Guidelines "
Safety Glass: Products compJ-ying with ANSI 297.1 and
testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category 1I
materiaLs.
I
I
I
I
InsuLating Glass Certification Program: Provide
insulating glass unj-ts permanently marked either on
spacers or at least one component lite of units with
08800 - 3GLAZING
D.
E.
appropriate certification label- of one of the inspecting
and testing agency indi-cated bel-ow:
1. Insul-ating Glass Certification Councif (IGCC) .
2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI).
3. National Certj-fied Testing Laboratories (NCTL) .
Gl-azier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who
has compJ,eted glazing similar in material-, des j-gn, and
extent to that indicated for Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.
Single-Source Responsibility for Gl-ass: Obtain glass from
one source for each product lndicated below:
1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class
indicated.
2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition
indicated.
3. Insulating glass of'each construction indicated.
Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories:
Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each
product and instalLation method indicated.
1. Testing is not required when glazing sealant
manufacturer can submit required preparation data that
is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous
testlng of current sealant products for adhesion to
and compatibility with submitted glazing materials.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's
directions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and
glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes'
direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1. Where insulating glass unj-ts will be exposed to
substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating
glass fabricator's recommendations for venti-ng and
sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Envj-ronmental Conditions: Do not proceed with gLazing
when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by glazing materials
manufacturer or when glazing channeL substrates are wet
from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
VIARRANTY
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
1'1L. I
1.8
A.
A.
GLAZING 08800 - 4
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
General: Warranties specified in thj-s Articl-e shal-l- not
deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and wil-l- be in
addition to and run concurrent wlth other warranties made
hrr thc Cnntra.irlr rrnder reorri rementS of the Contractvf
Documents.
Manufacturerrs Warranty on Coated Gl-ass Products: Submit
written warranty slgned by coated glass manufacturer
agreeing to furnish replacements for those coated glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definiti-ons"
article, f,o.b. point of manufacture' freight al-lowed
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated
below. Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal
conditions of use and not to handling' installing, and
cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's
published instructions.
1. warranty Perj-od: Manufacturer's standard but not fess
than 5 years after date of Substantial Completion'
C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass:Submit
written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating
glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating
glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"
article, f.o.b. polnt of manufacture, freight allowed
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated
beLow. Warranty covers only deteri-orati-on due to normaf
conditions of use and not to handling, installing,
protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass
manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less
than 5 years after date of Substantial Completlon-
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Availabl-e Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, products that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the products
specified in Product Data Sheets at end of this Section.
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Gfass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass,
flat), Class as indicated below, and Quality q3 (glazing
select) .
1. Class 1 (clear) unfess otherwise indicated.
2.3 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
GLAZING 08800 - s
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
A.
A.
B.
Fabrication Process: By horizontaf (roller-hearth)
process wi-th roff-wave distortion paraIlel to bottom edge
of glass as instafled, unl-ess otherwj-se indi-cated.
2.5
HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
Uncoated, Cl-ear, Heat-Treated Float Glass:
Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I
glass, flat), Class 1 (cl-ear) , Quality
select), kind as indicated bel-ow.
ASTM C 1048,
(transparentq3 (glazing
1. Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated.
2. Kind FT (ful1y tempered) where indicated.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering heat-treated glass
products that may be incorporated in the Vlork include' but
are not limited to, the following companies.
1. AFG lndustries, Inc.
2. Artistic Glass Products Co.
3. Cardinal IG.
4. Sai-nt-Gobain.
5. Fafconer Glass Industries.
6. Glasstemp, Inc.'l. Guardian Industries CorP.
8. HGP Industries.
9. LOF G1ass, Inc.
10. PPG Industries, Inc.
11. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
12. Tempglass.
L3. Viracon, Inc.
INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Glass
consisting of organicallY
by dehydrated air sPaces
with other requirements
Insulating Glass Product
Section.
Units:PreassembLed units
seaLed lites of glass separated
complying with ASTM E '7'7 4 and
indicated, including those in
Data Sheet at the end of this
For properties of individual- glass lites making up
units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in
this Section applicable to types, cfasses' kinds' and
conditions of glass products comprising lites of
insul-ating glass units.
Provide heat-treated float glass of kind indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated,Kind HS (heat
strengthened) where reconmended by manufacturer to
comply with system performance requirernents specified
and Kind FT (futly tempered) where safety glass is
designated or required.
z.
08800 - 6
A,
p
A.
t
I
I
t
t
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
t
2.6
2.'7
2.6
U-values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. ft' x deg F-
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying
with the fol-l-owinq requirements:
1 /-nmnaii hi l iiv-------"'': ,.t""a glazing sealants and tapes of
proven compatibility with other materials they will
contact, including glass products, seal-s of insulating
glass units, and glazing channel- substrates' under
conditions of installation and service, as
demonstrated by testing and fiel-d experience.
2. Suitability:Comp1y with sealant and glass
manufacturerrs recommendations for selecti-ng glazing
sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications
indicated and conditions existing at time of
install-at ion.
3. Colors: Provide col-or of exposed joint sealants to
comply with the following:
a. Provide selections made by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of standard colors for
products of type indicated.
B. Elastomeric Glazinq Seal-ant Standard:Provlde
manufacturer's standard chemica]1y curing, elastomeric
seafants of base potymer indicated that comply with ASTM
C 920 requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing
Sealant Product Data Sheet at the end of this Sect j-on,
including those referencing ASTM classificati-ons for Type'
Grade, C1ass and Uses.
GLAZING TAPES
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based
elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent,
nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by
tape and gJ.ass manufacturers for applicati-on indicated,
packaged on rolls with a release paper backing' and
complying with AAMA 800.
Expanded Cel-luIar Glazing Tape: Cl-osed-cel1, polyvinyl
chloride foam tape, factory coated wj-th adhesive on both
surfaces, packaged on rol-ls with refease Liner Protecting
adhesive, and complying wj-th AAMA 800 for product 810.5.
GLAZING GASKETS
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of
material indicatd below, and of profile and hardness
required to maintain watertight seal:
GLAZING 08800 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
A.
n
1. EPDM, ASTM C 864.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or moLded closed-cell'
integral-skinned gaskets of mateiral indicated below'
compj-ylng with ASTM c 509, Type II, black, and of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal-.
EPDM.
2.9
2.r0
(-Availabfe Manufacturers:Subj ect
requirements, manufacturers offering
incorporated in the work include, but
the following comPanles.
to compliance with
products that may be
are not limited to,
1. Preformed Gaskets:
a. Advanced Elastomer Systems' L.P.
b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
General-: Provlde products of material, size, and shape
cornplying with referenced glazing standard' requirements
of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials
involved for glazing application indicated, and with a
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
Cleaners, Primers and Seafers:
seaLant or gasket manufacturer.
Type recommended bY
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A
durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5.
Spacers: Elastomeric bl-ocks or continuous extrusions wj-th
a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for
installation indicated.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to
limit glass lateral movement (side-walki.g) -
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes
required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and
biie complying with recommendations of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required
to comply with system performance requirements-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
GI,AZING 08800 - 8
B.
A.
A.
?
D.
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
t
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
Examine glass
compliance with
F---.: -^ .,.1 r- l^! ! CtlltJ-ll9, WILIt
the fol-l-owing:
glazier rT rA eanl- f rrr
1. Manufacturing and install-ation tolerances, including
those for size, squareness, offsets at corners.2. Presence and functioning of weep system.3. Minimum required face or edge cl-earances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing
members.
Do not proceed with glazing
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
until-unsatisfactory
CLean glazing channels and other framj-ng members recei-vingglass immediately before gJ-azing. Remove coatings thatare not firnly bonded to substrates.
GLAZTNG, GENERAL
Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers ofg1ass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials,except where more stringent requirements are indicated,including those in referenced glazing publications.
Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawingsprovide necessary bite on g1ass, minimum edge and faceclearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, withreasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project
conditi-ons durinq installation.
Protect glass from edgeinstallation as follows:
damage during handJ-ing and
Remove damaged glass from Project si-te and 1ega11y
dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass wj-th edge
damage or other imperfections that, when instaJ.led,
weaken glass and i-mpa j- r performance and appearance.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated
manufacturers for installing glass lites.by glass
E. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 unltedinches (length plus height) as follows:
1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposi-te
each other.Instal-L correct size and spacing topreserve required face clearances, except wheregaskets and glazing tapes are used that have
demonstrated ability to maintain reguired face
08800 - 9
I
I
I
t
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
t
B.
D.
F.
A
B.
clearances and comply with system
requr-rements,
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers
use thickness equal to sealant width.
t:nr- rrqe thi r:kness sl i crht I v less9grv,
compressed thickness of tape.
performance
on glass and
With glazing
than flnal
F.
3.4
?q
c
GLAZING
Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of
referenced glazing publj-cati-ons, unless otherwise required
by glass manufacturer.
Set glass Iites j-n each series with uniform pattern, draw,
bow, and similar characteristi-cs.
TAPE GLAZING
Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed byglass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude
slightly above sightline of stops.
Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous
length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
Where frami-ng joints are vertical, cover these joints by
applying tapes to heads and s1l1s first and then to jambs.
Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints
by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and si-lls.
Place joints i-n tapes at corners of opening with adjoining
Iengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes
with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
Do not remove release paper from tape until- just before
each lite i-s installed.
Center glass lites in openings on setting bLocks and press
firmly against tape by inserting dense compressj-on gaskets
formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and
work toward centers of openings.
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
Fabrlcate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by
gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch
aLfowance during instal-Iation.
Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at
corners to compress gaskets producing a hreathertight seal
without developing bending stresses in glass. SeaL gasketjoints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
Instafl- gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing
stops.
08800 - 10
B.
A.
B.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T
t
I
I
I
t
I
3.'l
REFER
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
Install contj-nuous spacers between glass lites and glazing
stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
seaLant from extruding into gLass channel- weep systems
until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in
position to controJ- depth of instalfed sealant rel-ative to
edge clearance for optimum seal-ant performance.
Force sealants into glazing channel-s to eliminate voids
and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass
and channel surfaces.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial
wash away f rom glass , Insta.l-l pressuri zed gaskets to
protrude slightly out of channeL to eliminate dirt and
moisture pockets.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after
installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing
held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass
surface, Remove nonpermanent Iabels, and clean surfaces.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances
resulting from construction operations including weld
splatter.lf, despite such protection, contami-nating
substances do come into contact with glass' remove them
immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior
concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals
during constructi-on, but not less than once a month, for
build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and
remove as reconrmended by glass manufacturer.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped' cracked,
abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes,
accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more
than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that
estabfish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
TO FOLLOWING PRODUCT DATA SHEETS
08800 - 11
INSULATING GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET
Sealing System: Dual- seal, primary and secondary sealants:
manufacturer's standard seal-ants.
GLass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements:
Thickness of Each Lite: t/4"
Indoor Lite: Class 1 (cl-ear) float g1ass. Kind HS (heat
strengthenedl , Condition A (uncoated) , Class 1 (cfear) float
glass.
Exterior Pane of Clear Float Glass:with suspended substrateinner layer wi-th heat mirror 77 wavelength - selective
coating.
Nominal Performance Characteristi-cs are as indicated below:
Visibl-e Liqht Transnittance: 622
Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.35
Winter Niqhttime U-Value: 0.31
Shadinq Coefficient: 0.49
END OF SECTION O88OO
08800 - 12
I
t
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
IGI,AZING
A.
B.
D.
E.
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
T
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTTON 08830 -MIRRORED GLASS
PART
1.1
A.
L-Z
r.4
1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and
GeneraL and
Specif i-cation
SUMMARY
This Section
1. Fl-oat ql,ass mirrors.
SUBMITTALS
GeneraL: Submit the
Conditions of Contract
Sections.
general provisions of Contract, including
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Sections, appiy to this Section.
includes the foll-owinq:
f ollowi-ng in
and Dlvision
accordance with
1 Specification
Product data for each type of product specified including
description of materials and process used to produce
mirrored glass, including source of glass, glass coating
components, edge sealer, and quality control provisions.
Samples, 12 inches square in size, of each type of
mirrored glass specified, including edge treatment on 2
adjoining edges of samples.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers of mirrored
glass certifying that their Products and edge seal-ers
comply with specified requirements.
Mirror mastic glass coating compatibility test reports
from organic protective coating manufacturer indicating
that mirror mastic has been tested for compatibility and
adhesion with organic protective coating. Include organic
coating manufacturers I interpretation of test results
relative to performance and recommendations for use of
mastics with organic protective coating.
QUAL]TY ASSURANCE
GJ.azj-ng Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat
Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" except
where more stringent reguirements are indicated. Refer to
thls publication for definitions of glass and glazing
terms not otherwise defined in this Section or referenced
standards.
MIRRORED GLASS 08830 - 1
compry with t
1.5
PART
z-L
A.
B.Mirror Manufacturers'Document:
recommendations of National Association of MirrorManufacturers (NAMM) in its publication "MfRRORS, HandLewith Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care
and Handling of Mirrors,"
SingIe-Source Responsi-bj-lity: Provide products obtained
from one source for each type of mirror indj_cated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with manufacturer I s instructions for shipping,storlng, and handl-ing mirrored glass; avoid deteriorationof silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass
surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected
from moisture including condensation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with mirroredgl-ass installation until ambient conditions of temperatureand humidity wiIl be continuously maintained at valuesnear those indicated for final occupancy.
Coordinate mirror dimensj.ons and spacing with hardware foradjacent systems such as uri-nal- screens, switch plates,
2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
I
I
I
I
I
t
t
I
t
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
I
I
A.
A
B.
1. Ameri-can Mirror Co.2. Bassett Mirror Co.3. Binswanger Mirror Products
4. Carolina Mirror Corp.5. Consolidated Glass & Mirror6. Donisi Mirror Co., Inc.'7. FaLconer Gfass Industries,8. Gardner Mirror Corp.9. Gilded Mirrors. Inc.
10. Lenoir Mirror Co.
1l-. Messer Industries
L2. Stroupe Mirror Co.
13. Texas Mirror, Inc.
14. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc.
L5. Weaver Mirrors, Inc.
MIRRORED GLASS
Avail-abIe Manufacturers:Subj ect
requj-rements, manufacturers offering
incorporated in the Work include, butthe followinq:
Inc.
to compliance with
products that may be
are not limited to,
08830 - 2
A
B.
A.
B.
(.
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
z-z
2.3
2.9
GLASS FOR MIRROR PRODUCTION
Prim:rv Glass: Flo:t rrlass comnl rri na wiJ-h ASTM C 1036!l-.l.l[qrJ e Y4q!!rcnrri rcmcnis f nr Trrna T /l-r:nqn:rant. f I at ) encl for cl-ass! sYL.f rer"er \ llsrruysrv.ru,
and qual-itv indicated befow:
l.. Clear Float GLass:
(clear) .
n..^1 i.-.. ^avudrt Ly 9z-/rni rrnr\ 1- l rcc\ rrrf ! ! v! ,/ ,
M]RRORED GLASS PRODUCTION AND FABR]CATION
GLass Coating: Coat second surface of gfass wj-th
successive Layers of chemicafly deposited si-lver,
electrically or chemicalfy deposited copper, and
manufacturerr s standard protective organic coatlng to
produce coating system that compLies with FS DD-M-0041,
except with salt-spray test period extended to 300 hours
and undercutting, discol-orations, blackening, and sifver
impairment at mirror edges not greater than 1/8 inch.
Mirror Sizes: After appllcation of glass coating, cut
mirrored glass to final- sizes and i-n the following nominal
glass thickness as expressed by metric designation/nominal
decimal of an i,nch/ (traditional- designation) :
1. Thickness: 6-0 mm/0-23 inch/ (1/4 inch)
Mirror Edge Treatment:
indicated be1ow, withprevent chemical or
coating:
Provide forms of edge treatment
edges sealed after treatment to
atmospheric penetration of glass
l-. Beveled polished edge of 1/2" width shown.
2. Perform edge treatment and sealing j-n
imrnediately after cutting to final sizes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
factory
Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced
specifically for setting mirrors by spot application,
certified as compatible with glass coating by organic
protective coating manufacturer and approved by mirror
manufacturer.
Mirror Hardware: Extruded aluminum mirror hardware, of
size and profile indicated, in manufacturerrs standard
finish, complying with description below:
1.Clear polished finish.
Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metaL and al-loy as
toilet accessories and matchinq it in finished color and
MIRRORED GLASS 08830 - 3
texture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. General:
5.2
Mastlc Spot InstalLation System:
masti-c as foLLows:
InstaII mirrors with
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
t
I
h
d.
A.
Install mirrors to comply with printed
directions of mirror manufacturer, and with referenced
FGI'4A standard and NAMM document. Mount mirrors in place
to avoid distorting reflected images and provide space for
air circufation between back of mirror and face of
mounting surface.
l-. Identify and examine surfaces over which mirror is to
be mounted.Comply with manufacturer's printed
instafLation directions for preparation of mounting
surfaces i-ncluding coating surfaces with mastic
manufacturer's speci-al bond coating where applicable.
Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved by
manufacturers of mirror and backing material.
App1y mastic in spots to comply with mastj-c
manufacturer's printed directions for coverage and to
a]1ow ai-r circulation between back of rnirror and face
of mounting surface.
After mastic is applied, align mirror and press intoplace while mai-ntai-ning a rninimum alr space of 3/16
inch between back of mj.rror and mounting surface.
For wall-mounted mirrors instal-1 permanent means of
support at bottom and top edges with bottom support
designed to withstand mirror weight and top support to
prevent mirror from coming away from wal-l- al-ong top
edqes.
Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting
surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with
anchors or inserts as applicable.
For metal or plastic clips, place a felt orplastic pad between mirror and each c15-p to
prevent spalling of mirror edges.
For wal-I application provide clips along top of
mi-rror.For tile wainscot applications, provide spacersand shims as required for flush, flat
installation.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating
substances resultinq from construction operations.
MIRRORED GLASS 08830 - 4
D.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
Do not permit edges of mirror to be exposed to standing
water.
Maintain environmentaL conditions that wiII prevent mirror
from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other
sources for continuous periods of time.
Wash mirrors not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled
for inspectj-ons intended to establish date for Substantial
Completion. Wash gJ-ass by methods recommended in NAMM
document and by mirrored glass manufacturer. Use water or
glass cleaners free from substances capable of damaging
mirror edqes or qlass coatinq.
END OF SECTION 08830
MIRRORED GLASS 08830 - 5